davinci0.txt
8050 lines
| 350.1 KiB
| text/plain
|
TextLexer
Brian E Granger
|
r1337 | The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Notebooks of Leonardo Da Vinci, Complete | ||
by Leonardo Da Vinci | ||||
(#3 in our series by Leonardo Da Vinci) | ||||
Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the | ||||
copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing | ||||
this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. | ||||
This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project | ||||
Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the | ||||
header without written permission. | ||||
Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the | ||||
eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is | ||||
important information about your specific rights and restrictions in | ||||
how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a | ||||
donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. | ||||
**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** | ||||
**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** | ||||
*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** | ||||
Title: The Notebooks of Leonardo Da Vinci, Complete | ||||
Author: Leonardo Da Vinci | ||||
Release Date: Jan, 2004 [EBook #5000] | ||||
[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule] | ||||
[Most recently updated June 26, 2002] | ||||
Edition: 10 | ||||
Language: English | ||||
Character set encoding: ASCII | ||||
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, THE NOTEBOOKS OF LEONARDO DA | ||||
VINCI, COMPLETE *** | ||||
This eBook was produced by Charles Aldarondo and the Distributed | ||||
Proofreaders team. | ||||
The Notebooks of Leonardo Da Vinci | ||||
Volume 1 | ||||
Translated by Jean Paul Richter | ||||
1888 | ||||
PREFACE. | ||||
A singular fatality has ruled the destiny of nearly all the most | ||||
famous of Leonardo da Vinci's works. Two of the three most important | ||||
were never completed, obstacles having arisen during his life-time, | ||||
which obliged him to leave them unfinished; namely the Sforza | ||||
Monument and the Wall-painting of the Battle of Anghiari, while the | ||||
third--the picture of the Last Supper at Milan--has suffered | ||||
irremediable injury from decay and the repeated restorations to | ||||
which it was recklessly subjected during the XVIIth and XVIIIth | ||||
centuries. Nevertheless, no other picture of the Renaissance has | ||||
become so wellknown and popular through copies of every description. | ||||
Vasari says, and rightly, in his Life of Leonardo, "that he laboured | ||||
much more by his word than in fact or by deed", and the biographer | ||||
evidently had in his mind the numerous works in Manuscript which | ||||
have been preserved to this day. To us, now, it seems almost | ||||
inexplicable that these valuable and interesting original texts | ||||
should have remained so long unpublished, and indeed forgotten. It | ||||
is certain that during the XVIth and XVIIth centuries their | ||||
exceptional value was highly appreciated. This is proved not merely | ||||
by the prices which they commanded, but also by the exceptional | ||||
interest which has been attached to the change of ownership of | ||||
merely a few pages of Manuscript. | ||||
That, notwithstanding this eagerness to possess the Manuscripts, | ||||
their contents remained a mystery, can only be accounted for by the | ||||
many and great difficulties attending the task of deciphering them. | ||||
The handwriting is so peculiar that it requires considerable | ||||
practice to read even a few detached phrases, much more to solve | ||||
with any certainty the numerous difficulties of alternative | ||||
readings, and to master the sense as a connected whole. Vasari | ||||
observes with reference to Leonardos writing: "he wrote backwards, | ||||
in rude characters, and with the left hand, so that any one who is | ||||
not practised in reading them, cannot understand them". The aid of a | ||||
mirror in reading reversed handwriting appears to me available only | ||||
for a first experimental reading. Speaking from my own experience, | ||||
the persistent use of it is too fatiguing and inconvenient to be | ||||
practically advisable, considering the enormous mass of Manuscripts | ||||
to be deciphered. And as, after all, Leonardo's handwriting runs | ||||
backwards just as all Oriental character runs backwards--that is | ||||
to say from right to left--the difficulty of reading direct from the | ||||
writing is not insuperable. This obvious peculiarity in the writing | ||||
is not, however, by any means the only obstacle in the way of | ||||
mastering the text. Leonardo made use of an orthography peculiar to | ||||
himself; he had a fashion of amalgamating several short words into | ||||
one long one, or, again, he would quite arbitrarily divide a long | ||||
word into two separate halves; added to this there is no punctuation | ||||
whatever to regulate the division and construction of the sentences, | ||||
nor are there any accents--and the reader may imagine that such | ||||
difficulties were almost sufficient to make the task seem a | ||||
desperate one to a beginner. It is therefore not surprising that the | ||||
good intentions of some of Leonardo s most reverent admirers should | ||||
have failed. | ||||
Leonardos literary labours in various departments both of Art and of | ||||
Science were those essentially of an enquirer, hence the analytical | ||||
method is that which he employs in arguing out his investigations | ||||
and dissertations. The vast structure of his scientific theories is | ||||
consequently built up of numerous separate researches, and it is | ||||
much to be lamented that he should never have collated and arranged | ||||
them. His love for detailed research--as it seems to me--was the | ||||
reason that in almost all the Manuscripts, the different paragraphs | ||||
appear to us to be in utter confusion; on one and the same page, | ||||
observations on the most dissimilar subjects follow each other | ||||
without any connection. A page, for instance, will begin with some | ||||
principles of astronomy, or the motion of the earth; then come the | ||||
laws of sound, and finally some precepts as to colour. Another page | ||||
will begin with his investigations on the structure of the | ||||
intestines, and end with philosophical remarks as to the relations | ||||
of poetry to painting; and so forth. | ||||
Leonardo himself lamented this confusion, and for that reason I do | ||||
not think that the publication of the texts in the order in which | ||||
they occur in the originals would at all fulfil his intentions. No | ||||
reader could find his way through such a labyrinth; Leonardo himself | ||||
could not have done it. | ||||
Added to this, more than half of the five thousand manuscript pages | ||||
which now remain to us, are written on loose leaves, and at present | ||||
arranged in a manner which has no justification beyond the fancy of | ||||
the collector who first brought them together to make volumes of | ||||
more or less extent. Nay, even in the volumes, the pages of which | ||||
were numbered by Leonardo himself, their order, so far as the | ||||
connection of the texts was concerned, was obviously a matter of | ||||
indifference to him. The only point he seems to have kept in view, | ||||
when first writing down his notes, was that each observation should | ||||
be complete to the end on the page on which it was begun. The | ||||
exceptions to this rule are extremely few, and it is certainly | ||||
noteworthy that we find in such cases, in bound volumes with his | ||||
numbered pages, the written observations: "turn over", "This is the | ||||
continuation of the previous page", and the like. Is not this | ||||
sufficient to prove that it was only in quite exceptional cases that | ||||
the writer intended the consecutive pages to remain connected, when | ||||
he should, at last, carry out the often planned arrangement of his | ||||
writings? | ||||
What this final arrangement was to be, Leonardo has in most cases | ||||
indicated with considerable completeness. In other cases this | ||||
authoritative clue is wanting, but the difficulties arising from | ||||
this are not insuperable; for, as the subject of the separate | ||||
paragraphs is always distinct and well defined in itself, it is | ||||
quite possible to construct a well-planned whole, out of the | ||||
scattered materials of his scientific system, and I may venture to | ||||
state that I have devoted especial care and thought to the due | ||||
execution of this responsible task. | ||||
The beginning of Leonardo's literary labours dates from about his | ||||
thirty-seventh year, and he seems to have carried them on without | ||||
any serious interruption till his death. Thus the Manuscripts that | ||||
remain represent a period of about thirty years. Within this space | ||||
of time his handwriting altered so little that it is impossible to | ||||
judge from it of the date of any particular text. The exact dates, | ||||
indeed, can only be assigned to certain note-books in which the year | ||||
is incidentally indicated, and in which the order of the leaves has | ||||
not been altered since Leonardo used them. The assistance these | ||||
afford for a chronological arrangement of the Manuscripts is | ||||
generally self evident. By this clue I have assigned to the original | ||||
Manuscripts now scattered through England, Italy and France, the | ||||
order of their production, as in many matters of detail it is highly | ||||
important to be able to verify the time and place at which certain | ||||
observations were made and registered. For this purpose the | ||||
Bibliography of the Manuscripts given at the end of Vol. II, may be | ||||
regarded as an Index, not far short of complete, of all Leonardo s | ||||
literary works now extant. The consecutive numbers (from 1 to 1566) | ||||
at the head of each passage in this work, indicate their logical | ||||
sequence with reference to the subjects; while the letters and | ||||
figures to the left of each paragraph refer to the original | ||||
Manuscript and number of the page, on which that particular passage | ||||
is to be found. Thus the reader, by referring to the List of | ||||
Manuscripts at the beginning of Volume I, and to the Bibliography at | ||||
the end of Volume II, can, in every instance, easily ascertain, not | ||||
merely the period to which the passage belongs, but also exactly | ||||
where it stood in the original document. Thus, too, by following the | ||||
sequence of the numbers in the Bibliographical index, the reader may | ||||
reconstruct the original order of the Manuscripts and recompose the | ||||
various texts to be found on the original sheets--so much of it, | ||||
that is to say, as by its subject-matter came within the scope of | ||||
this work. It may, however, be here observed that Leonardo s | ||||
Manuscripts contain, besides the passages here printed, a great | ||||
number of notes and dissertations on Mechanics, Physics, and some | ||||
other subjects, many of which could only be satisfactorily dealt | ||||
with by specialists. I have given as complete a review of these | ||||
writings as seemed necessary in the Bibliographical notes. | ||||
In 1651, Raphael Trichet Dufresne, of Paris, published a selection | ||||
from Leonardo's writings on painting, and this treatise became so | ||||
popular that it has since been reprinted about two-and-twenty times, | ||||
and in six different languages. But none of these editions were | ||||
derived from the original texts, which were supposed to have been | ||||
lost, but from early copies, in which Leonardo's text had been more | ||||
or less mutilated, and which were all fragmentary. The oldest and on | ||||
the whole the best copy of Leonardo's essays and precepts on | ||||
Painting is in the Vatican Library; this has been twice printed, | ||||
first by Manzi, in 1817, and secondly by Ludwig, in 1882. Still, | ||||
this ancient copy, and the published editions of it, contain much | ||||
for which it would be rash to hold Leonardo responsible, and some | ||||
portions--such as the very important rules for the proportions of | ||||
the human figure--are wholly wanting; on the other hand they contain | ||||
passages which, if they are genuine, cannot now be verified from any | ||||
original Manuscript extant. These copies, at any rate neither give | ||||
us the original order of the texts, as written by Leonardo, nor do | ||||
they afford any substitute, by connecting them on a rational scheme; | ||||
indeed, in their chaotic confusion they are anything rather than | ||||
satisfactory reading. The fault, no doubt, rests with the compiler | ||||
of the Vatican copy, which would seem to be the source whence all | ||||
the published and extensively known texts were derived; for, instead | ||||
of arranging the passages himself, he was satisfied with recording a | ||||
suggestion for a final arrangement of them into eight distinct | ||||
parts, without attempting to carry out his scheme. Under the | ||||
mistaken idea that this plan of distribution might be that, not of | ||||
the compiler, but of Leonardo himself, the various editors, down to | ||||
the present day, have very injudiciously continued to adopt this | ||||
order--or rather disorder. | ||||
I, like other enquirers, had given up the original Manuscript of the | ||||
Trattato della Pittura for lost, till, in the beginning of 1880, I | ||||
was enabled, by the liberality of Lord Ashburnham, to inspect his | ||||
Manuscripts, and was so happy as to discover among them the original | ||||
text of the best-known portion of the Trattato in his magnificent | ||||
library at Ashburnham Place. Though this discovery was of a fragment | ||||
only--but a considerable fragment--inciting me to further search, | ||||
it gave the key to the mystery which had so long enveloped the first | ||||
origin of all the known copies of the Trattato. The extensive | ||||
researches I was subsequently enabled to prosecute, and the results | ||||
of which are combined in this work, were only rendered possible by | ||||
the unrestricted permission granted me to investigate all the | ||||
Manuscripts by Leonardo dispersed throughout Europe, and to | ||||
reproduce the highly important original sketches they contain, by | ||||
the process of "photogravure". Her Majesty the Queen graciously | ||||
accorded me special permission to copy for publication the | ||||
Manuscripts at the Royal Library at Windsor. The Commission Centrale | ||||
Administrative de l'Institut de France, Paris, gave me, in the most | ||||
liberal manner, in answer to an application from Sir Frederic | ||||
Leighton, P. R. A., Corresponding member of the Institut, free | ||||
permission to work for several months in their private collection at | ||||
deciphering the Manuscripts preserved there. The same favour which | ||||
Lord Ashburnham had already granted me was extended to me by the | ||||
Earl of Leicester, the Marchese Trivulsi, and the Curators of the | ||||
Ambrosian Library at Milan, by the Conte Manzoni at Rome and by | ||||
other private owners of Manuscripts of Leonardo's; as also by the | ||||
Directors of the Louvre at Paris; the Accademia at Venice; the | ||||
Uffizi at Florence; the Royal Library at Turin; and the British | ||||
Museum, and the South Kensington Museum. I am also greatly indebted | ||||
to the Librarians of these various collections for much assistance | ||||
in my labours; and more particularly to Monsieur Louis Lalanne, of | ||||
the Institut de France, the Abbate Ceriani, of the Ambrosian | ||||
Library, Mr. Maude Thompson, Keeper of Manuscripts at the British | ||||
Museum, Mr. Holmes, the Queens Librarian at Windsor, the Revd Vere | ||||
Bayne, Librarian of Christ Church College at Oxford, and the Revd A. | ||||
Napier, Librarian to the Earl of Leicester at Holkham Hall. | ||||
In correcting the Italian text for the press, I have had the | ||||
advantage of valuable advice from the Commendatore Giov. Morelli, | ||||
Senatore del Regno, and from Signor Gustavo Frizzoni, of Milan. The | ||||
translation, under many difficulties, of the Italian text into | ||||
English, is mainly due to Mrs. R. C. Bell; while the rendering of | ||||
several of the most puzzling and important passages, particularly in | ||||
the second half of Vol. I, I owe to the indefatigable interest taken | ||||
in this work by Mr. E. J. Poynter R. A. Finally I must express my | ||||
thanks to Mr. Alfred Marks, of Long Ditton, who has most kindly | ||||
assisted me throughout in the revision of the proof sheets. | ||||
The notes and dissertations on the texts on Architecture in Vol. II | ||||
I owe to my friend Baron Henri de Geymuller, of Paris. | ||||
I may further mention with regard to the illustrations, that the | ||||
negatives for the production of the "photo-gravures" by Monsieur | ||||
Dujardin of Paris were all taken direct from the originals. | ||||
It is scarcely necessary to add that most of the drawings here | ||||
reproduced in facsimile have never been published before. As I am | ||||
now, on the termination of a work of several years' duration, in a | ||||
position to review the general tenour of Leonardos writings, I may | ||||
perhaps be permitted to add a word as to my own estimate of the | ||||
value of their contents. I have already shown that it is due to | ||||
nothing but a fortuitous succession of unfortunate circumstances, | ||||
that we should not, long since, have known Leonardo, not merely as a | ||||
Painter, but as an Author, a Philosopher, and a Naturalist. There | ||||
can be no doubt that in more than one department his principles and | ||||
discoveries were infinitely more in accord with the teachings of | ||||
modern science, than with the views of his contemporaries. For this | ||||
reason his extraordinary gifts and merits are far more likely to be | ||||
appreciated in our own time than they could have been during the | ||||
preceding centuries. He has been unjustly accused of having | ||||
squandered his powers, by beginning a variety of studies and then, | ||||
having hardly begun, throwing them aside. The truth is that the | ||||
labours of three centuries have hardly sufficed for the elucidation | ||||
of some of the problems which occupied his mighty mind. | ||||
Alexander von Humboldt has borne witness that "he was the first to | ||||
start on the road towards the point where all the impressions of our | ||||
senses converge in the idea of the Unity of Nature" Nay, yet more | ||||
may be said. The very words which are inscribed on the monument of | ||||
Alexander von Humboldt himself, at Berlin, are perhaps the most | ||||
appropriate in which we can sum up our estimate of Leonardo's | ||||
genius: | ||||
"Majestati naturae par ingenium." | ||||
LONDON, April 1883. | ||||
F. P. R. | ||||
CONTENTS OF VOLUME I. | ||||
PROLEGOMENA AND GENERAL INTRODUCTION TO THE BOOK ON PAINTING | ||||
Clavis Sigillorum and Index of Manuscripts.--The author's intention | ||||
to publish his MSS. (1).--The preparation of the MSS. for | ||||
publication (2).--Admonition to readers (3).--The disorder in the | ||||
MSS. (4).--Suggestions for the arrangement of MSS. treating of | ||||
particular subjects (5--8).--General introductions to the book on | ||||
painting (9--13).--The plan of the book on painting (14--17).--The | ||||
use of the book on painting (18).--Necessity of theoretical | ||||
knowledge (19, 20).--The function of the eye (21--23).--Variability | ||||
of the eye (24).--Focus of sight (25).--Differences of perception by | ||||
one eye and by both eyes (26--29).--The comparative size of the | ||||
image depends on the amount of light (30--39). | ||||
II. | ||||
LINEAR PERSPECTIVE | ||||
General remarks on perspective (40--41).--The elements of | ||||
perspective:--of the point (42--46).--Of the line (47--48).--The | ||||
nature of the outline (49).--Definition of perspective (50).--The | ||||
perception of the object depends on the direction of the eye | ||||
(51).--Experimental proof of the existence of the pyramid of sight | ||||
(52--55).--The relations of the distance point to the vanishing | ||||
point (55--56).--How to measure the pyramid of vision (57).--The | ||||
production of the pyramid of vision (58--64).--Proof by experiment | ||||
(65--66).--General conclusions (67).--That the contrary is | ||||
impossible (68).--A parallel case (69).--The function of the eye, as | ||||
explained by the camera obscura (70--71).--The practice of | ||||
perspective (72--73).--Refraction of the rays falling upon the eye | ||||
(74--75).--The inversion of the images (76).--The intersection of | ||||
the rays (77--82).--Demonstration of perspective by means of a | ||||
vertical glass plane (83--85.)--The angle of sight varies with the | ||||
distance (86--88).--Opposite pyramids in juxtaposition (89).--On | ||||
simple and complex perspective (90).--The proper distance of objects | ||||
from the eye (91--92).--The relative size of objects with regard to | ||||
their distance from the eye (93--98).--The apparent size of objects | ||||
denned by calculation (99--106).--On natural perspective (107--109). | ||||
III. | ||||
SIX BOOKS ON LIGHT AND SHADE | ||||
GENERAL INTRODUCTION.--Prolegomena (110).--Scheme of the books on | ||||
light and shade (111).--Different principles and plans of treatment | ||||
(112--116).--Different sorts of light (117--118).--Definition of | ||||
the nature of shadows (119--122).--Of the various kinds of shadows | ||||
(123--125).--Of the various kinds of light (126--127).--General | ||||
remarks (128--129).--FIRST BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE.--On the nature | ||||
of light (130--131).--The difference between light and lustre | ||||
(132--135).--The relations of luminous to illuminated bodies (136). | ||||
--Experiments on the relation of light and shadow within a room | ||||
(137--140).--Light and shadow with regard to the position of the | ||||
eye (141--145).--The law of the incidence of light | ||||
(146--147).--SECOND BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE.--Gradations of strength | ||||
in the shadows (148--149).--On the intensity of shadows as dependent | ||||
on the distance from the light (150--152).--On the proportion of | ||||
light and shadow (153--157).--THIRD BOOK ON LIGHT AND | ||||
SHADE.--Definition of derived shadow (158--159).--Different sorts of | ||||
derived shadows (160--162).--On the relation of derived and primary | ||||
shadow (163--165).--On the shape of derived shadows (166--174).--On | ||||
the relative intensity of derived shadows (175--179).--Shadow as | ||||
produced by two lights of different size (180--181).--The effect of | ||||
light at different distances (182).--Further complications in the | ||||
derived shadows (183--187).--FOURTH BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE.--On the | ||||
shape of cast shadows (188--191).--On the outlines of cast shadows | ||||
(192--195).--On the relative size of cast shadows (196. | ||||
197).--Effects on cast shadows by the tone of the back ground | ||||
(198).--A disputed proposition (199).--On the relative depth of | ||||
cast shadows (200--202).--FIFTH BOOK ON LIGHT AND | ||||
SHADE.--Principles of reflection (203. 204).--On reverberation | ||||
(205).--Reflection on water (206. 207).--Experiments with the mirror | ||||
(208--210).--Appendix:--On shadows in movement (211--212).--SIXTH | ||||
BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE.--The effect of rays passing through holes | ||||
(213. 214).--On gradation of shadows (215. 216).--On relative | ||||
proportion of light and shadows (216--221). | ||||
IV. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE OF DISAPPEARANCE | ||||
Definition (222. 223).--An illustration by experiment (224).--A | ||||
guiding rule (225).---An experiment (226).--On indistinctness at | ||||
short distances (227--231).--On indistinctness at great distances | ||||
(232--234).--The importance of light and shade in the Prospettiva | ||||
de' perdimenti (235--239).--The effect of light or dark backgrounds | ||||
on the apparent size of objects (240--250).--Propositions on | ||||
Prospettiva de' perdimenti from MS. C. (250--262). | ||||
V. | ||||
THEORY OF COLOURS | ||||
The reciprocal effects of colours on objects placed opposite each | ||||
other (263--271).--Combination of different colours in cast shadows | ||||
(272).--The effect of colours in the camera obscura (273. 274).--On | ||||
the colours of derived shadows (275. 276).--On the nature of colours | ||||
(277. 278).--On gradations in the depth of colours (279. 280).--On | ||||
the reflection of colours (281--283).--On the use of dark and light | ||||
colours in painting (284--286).--On the colours of the rainbow | ||||
(287--288). | ||||
VI. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE OF COLOUR AND AERIAL PERSPECTIVE | ||||
General rules (289--291).--An exceptional case (292).--An experiment | ||||
(293).--The practice of the Prospettiva de' colori (294).--The rules | ||||
of aerial perspective (295--297).--On the relative density of the | ||||
atmosphere (298--299).--On the colour of the atmosphere (300--307). | ||||
VII. | ||||
ON THE PROPORTIONS AND ON THE MOVEMENTS OF THE HUMAN FIGURE | ||||
Preliminary observations (308. 309).--Proportions of the head and | ||||
face (310--318).--Proportions of the head seen in front | ||||
(319--321).--Proportions of the foot (322--323).--Relative | ||||
proportions of the hand and foot (324).--Relative proportions of | ||||
the foot and of the face (325--327).--Proportions of the leg | ||||
(328--331).--On the central point of the whole body (332).--The | ||||
relative proportions of the torso and of the whole figure | ||||
(333).--The relative proportions of the head and of the torso | ||||
(334).--The relative proportions of the torso and of the leg (335. | ||||
336).--The relative proportions of the torso and of the foot | ||||
(337).--The proportions of the whole figure (338--341).--The torso | ||||
from the front and back (342).--Vitruvius' scheme of proportions | ||||
(343).--The arm and head (344).--Proportions of the arm | ||||
(345--349).--The movement of the arm (350--354).--The movement of | ||||
the torso (355--361).--The proportions vary at different ages | ||||
(362--367).--The movement of the human figure (368--375).--Of | ||||
walking up and down (375--379).--On the human body in action | ||||
(380--388).--On hair falling down in curls (389).--On draperies | ||||
(390--392). | ||||
VIII. | ||||
BOTANY FOR PAINTERS, AND ELEMENTS OF LANDSCAPE PAINTING | ||||
Classification of trees (393).--The relative thickness of the | ||||
branches to the trunk (394--396).--The law of proportion in the | ||||
growth of the branches (397--402).--The direction of growth | ||||
(403--407).--The forms of trees (408--411).--The insertion of the | ||||
leaves (412--419).--Light on branches and leaves (420--422).--The | ||||
proportions of light and shade in a leaf (423--426).--Of the | ||||
transparency of leaves (427--429).--The gradations of shade and | ||||
colour in leaves (430--434).--A classification of trees according to | ||||
their colours (435).--The proportions of light and shade in trees | ||||
(436--440).--The distribution of light and shade with reference to | ||||
the position of the spectator (441--443).--The effects of morning | ||||
light (444--448).--The effects of midday light (449).--The | ||||
appearance of trees in the distance (450--451).--The cast shadow of | ||||
trees (452. 453).--Light and shade on groups of trees | ||||
(454--457).--On the treatment of light for landscapes | ||||
(458--464).--On the treatment of light for views of towns | ||||
(465--469).--The effect of wind on trees (470--473).--Light and | ||||
shade on clouds (474--477).--On images reflected in water (478).--Of | ||||
rainbows and rain (479. 480).--Of flower seeds (481). | ||||
IX. | ||||
THE PRACTICE OF PAINTING | ||||
I. MORAL PRECEPTS FOR THE STUDENT OF PAINTING.--How to ascertain the | ||||
dispositions for an artistic career (482).--The course of | ||||
instruction for an artist (483--485).--The study of the antique | ||||
(486. 487).--The necessity of anatomical knowledge (488. 489).--How | ||||
to acquire practice (490).--Industry and thoroughness the first | ||||
conditions (491--493.)--The artist's private life and choice of | ||||
company (493. 494).--The distribution of time for studying (495-- | ||||
497).--On the productive power of minor artists (498--501).--A | ||||
caution against one-sided study (502).--How to acquire universality | ||||
(503--506).--Useful games and exercises (507. 508).--II. THE | ||||
ARTIST'S STUDIO.--INSTRUMENTS AND HELPS FOR THE APPLICATION OF | ||||
PERSPECTIVE.--ON JUDGING OF A PICTURE.--On the size of the studio | ||||
(509).--On the construction of windows (510--512).--On the best | ||||
light for painting (513--520).--On various helps in preparing a | ||||
picture (521--530).--On the management of works (531. 532).--On the | ||||
limitations of painting (533--535).--On the choice of a position | ||||
(536. 537).--The apparent size of figures in a picture (538. | ||||
539).--The right position of the artist, when painting and of the | ||||
spectator (540--547).--III. THE PRACTICAL METHODS OF LIGHT AND SHADE | ||||
AND AERIAL PERSPECTIVE.--Gradations of light and shade (548).--On | ||||
the choice of light for a picture (549--554).--The distribution of | ||||
light and shade (555--559).--The juxtaposition of light and shade | ||||
(560. 561).--On the lighting of the background (562--565).--On the | ||||
lighting of white objects (566).--The methods of aerial perspective | ||||
(567--570).--IV. OF PORTRAIT AND FIGURE PAINTING.--Of sketching | ||||
figures and portraits (571. 572).--The position of the head | ||||
(573).--Of the light on the face (574--576).--General suggestions | ||||
for historical pictures (577--581).--How to represent the | ||||
differences of age and sex (582. 583).--Of representing the emotions | ||||
(584).--Of representing imaginary animals (585).--The selection of | ||||
forms (586--591).--How to pose figures (592).--Of appropriate | ||||
gestures (593--600).--V. SUGGESTIONS FOR COMPOSITIONS.--Of painting | ||||
battle-pieces (601--603).--Of depicting night-scenes (604).--Of | ||||
depicting a tempest (605. 606).--Of representing the deluge | ||||
(607--609).--Of depicting natural phenomena (610. 611).--VI. THE | ||||
ARTIST'S MATERIALS.--Of chalk and paper (612--617).--On the | ||||
preparation and use of colours (618--627).--Of preparing the panel | ||||
(628).--The preparation of oils (629--634).--On varnishes (635-- | ||||
637).--On chemical _materials (638--650).--VII. PHILOSOPHY AND | ||||
HISTORY OF THE ART OF PAINTING.--The relation of art and nature | ||||
(651. 652).--Painting is superior to poetry (653. 654).--Painting is | ||||
superior to sculpture (655. 656).--Aphorisms (657--659).--On the | ||||
history of painting (660. 661).--The painter's scope (662). | ||||
X. | ||||
STUDIES AND SKETCHES FOR PICTURES AND DECORATIONS | ||||
On pictures of the Madonna (663).--Bernardo di Bandino's portrait | ||||
(664).--Notes on the Last Supper (665--668).--On the battle of | ||||
Anghiari (669).--Allegorical representations referring to the duke | ||||
of Milan (670--673).--Allegorical representations | ||||
(674--678).--Arrangement of a picture (679).--List of drawings | ||||
(680).--Mottoes and Emblems (681--702). | ||||
The author's intention to publish his MSS. | ||||
1. | ||||
How by a certain machine many may stay some time under water. And | ||||
how and wherefore I do not describe my method of remaining under | ||||
water and how long I can remain without eating. And I do not publish | ||||
nor divulge these, by reason of the evil nature of men, who would | ||||
use them for assassinations at the bottom of the sea by destroying | ||||
ships, and sinking them, together with the men in them. Nevertheless | ||||
I will impart others, which are not dangerous because the mouth of | ||||
the tube through which you breathe is above the water, supported on | ||||
air sacks or cork. | ||||
[Footnote: The leaf on which this passage is written, is headed with | ||||
the words _Casi_ 39, and most of these cases begin with the word | ||||
'_Come_', like the two here given, which are the 26th and 27th. 7. | ||||
_Sughero_. In the Codex Antlanticus 377a; 1170a there is a sketch, | ||||
drawn with the pen, representing a man with a tube in his mouth, and | ||||
at the farther end of the tube a disk. By the tube the word | ||||
'_Channa_' is written, and by the disk the word '_sughero_'.] | ||||
The preparation of the MSS. for publication. | ||||
2. | ||||
When you put together the science of the motions of water, remember | ||||
to include under each proposition its application and use, in order | ||||
that this science may not be useless.-- | ||||
[Footnote: A comparatively small portion of Leonardo's notes on | ||||
water-power was published at Bologna in 1828, under the title: "_Del | ||||
moto e misura dell'Acqua, di L. da Vinci_".] | ||||
Admonition to readers. | ||||
3. | ||||
Let no man who is not a Mathematician read the elements of my work. | ||||
The disorder in the MSS. | ||||
4. | ||||
Begun at Florence, in the house of Piero di Braccio Martelli, on the | ||||
22nd day of March 1508. And this is to be a collection without | ||||
order, taken from many papers which I have copied here, hoping to | ||||
arrange them later each in its place, according to the subjects of | ||||
which they may treat. But I believe that before I am at the end of | ||||
this [task] I shall have to repeat the same things several times; | ||||
for which, O reader! do not blame me, for the subjects are many and | ||||
memory cannot retain them [all] and say: 'I will not write this | ||||
because I wrote it before.' And if I wished to avoid falling into | ||||
this fault, it would be necessary in every case when I wanted to | ||||
copy [a passage] that, not to repeat myself, I should read over all | ||||
that had gone before; and all the more since the intervals are long | ||||
between one time of writing and the next. | ||||
[Footnote: 1. In the history of Florence in the early part of the | ||||
XVIth century _Piero di Braccio Martelli_ is frequently mentioned as | ||||
_Commissario della Signoria_. He was famous for his learning and at | ||||
his death left four books on Mathematics ready for the press; comp. | ||||
LITTA, _Famiglie celebri Italiane_, _Famiglia Martelli di | ||||
Firenze_.--In the Official Catalogue of MSS. in the Brit. Mus., New | ||||
Series Vol. I., where this passage is printed, _Barto_ has been | ||||
wrongly given for Braccio. | ||||
2. _addi 22 di marzo 1508_. The Christian era was computed in | ||||
Florence at that time from the Incarnation (Lady day, March 25th). | ||||
Hence this should be 1509 by our reckoning. | ||||
3. _racolto tratto di molte carte le quali io ho qui copiate_. We | ||||
must suppose that Leonardo means that he has copied out his own MSS. | ||||
and not those of others. The first thirteen leaves of the MS. in the | ||||
Brit. Mus. are a fair copy of some notes on physics.] | ||||
Suggestions for the arrangement of MSS treating of particular | ||||
subjects.(5-8). | ||||
5. | ||||
Of digging a canal. Put this in the Book of useful inventions and in | ||||
proving them bring forward the propositions already proved. And this | ||||
is the proper order; since if you wished to show the usefulness of | ||||
any plan you would be obliged again to devise new machines to prove | ||||
its utility and thus would confuse the order of the forty Books and | ||||
also the order of the diagrams; that is to say you would have to mix | ||||
up practice with theory, which would produce a confused and | ||||
incoherent work. | ||||
6. | ||||
I am not to blame for putting forward, in the course of my work on | ||||
science, any general rule derived from a previous conclusion. | ||||
7. | ||||
The Book of the science of Mechanics must precede the Book of useful | ||||
inventions.--Have your books on anatomy bound! [Footnote: 4. The | ||||
numerous notes on anatomy written on loose leaves and now in the | ||||
Royal collection at Windsor can best be classified in four Books, | ||||
corresponding to the different character and size of the paper. When | ||||
Leonardo speaks of '_li tua libri di notomia_', he probably means | ||||
the MSS. which still exist; if this hypothesis is correct the | ||||
present condition of these leaves might seem to prove that he only | ||||
carried out his purpose with one of the Books on anatomy. A borrowed | ||||
book on Anatomy is mentioned in F.O.] | ||||
8. | ||||
The order of your book must proceed on this plan: first simple | ||||
beams, then (those) supported from below, then suspended in part, | ||||
then wholly [suspended]. Then beams as supporting other weights | ||||
[Footnote: 4. Leonardo's notes on Mechanics are extraordinarily | ||||
numerous; but, for the reasons assigned in my introduction, they | ||||
have not been included in the present work.]. | ||||
General introductions to the book on Painting (9-13). | ||||
9. | ||||
INTRODUCTION. | ||||
Seeing that I can find no subject specially useful or | ||||
pleasing--since the men who have come before me have taken for their | ||||
own every useful or necessary theme--I must do like one who, being | ||||
poor, comes last to the fair, and can find no other way of providing | ||||
himself than by taking all the things already seen by other buyers, | ||||
and not taken but refused by reason of their lesser value. I, then, | ||||
will load my humble pack with this despised and rejected | ||||
merchandise, the refuse of so many buyers; and will go about to | ||||
distribute it, not indeed in great cities, but in the poorer towns, | ||||
taking such a price as the wares I offer may be worth. [Footnote: It | ||||
need hardly be pointed out that there is in this 'Proemio' a covert | ||||
irony. In the second and third prefaces, Leonardo characterises his | ||||
rivals and opponents more closely. His protest is directed against | ||||
Neo-latinism as professed by most of the humanists of his time; its | ||||
futility is now no longer questioned.] | ||||
10. | ||||
INTRODUCTION. | ||||
I know that many will call this useless work [Footnote: 3. questa | ||||
essere opera inutile. By opera we must here understand libro di | ||||
pittura and particularly the treatise on Perspective.]; and they | ||||
will be those of whom Demetrius [Footnote: 4. Demetrio. "With regard | ||||
to the passage attributed to Demetrius", Dr. H. MULLER STRUBING | ||||
writes, "I know not what to make of it. It is certainly not | ||||
Demetrius Phalereus that is meant and it can hardly be Demetrius | ||||
Poliorcetes. Who then can it be--for the name is a very common one? | ||||
It may be a clerical error for Demades and the maxim is quite in the | ||||
spirit of his writings I have not however been able to find any | ||||
corresponding passage either in the 'Fragments' (C. MULLER, _Orat. | ||||
Att._, II. 441) nor in the Supplements collected by DIETZ (_Rhein. | ||||
Mus._, vol. 29, p. 108)." | ||||
The same passage occurs as a simple Memorandum in the MS. Tr. 57, | ||||
apparently as a note for this '_Proemio_' thus affording some data | ||||
as to the time where these introductions were written.] declared | ||||
that he took no more account of the wind that came out their mouth | ||||
in words, than of that they expelled from their lower parts: men who | ||||
desire nothing but material riches and are absolutely devoid of that | ||||
of wisdom, which is the food and the only true riches of the mind. | ||||
For so much more worthy as the soul is than the body, so much more | ||||
noble are the possessions of the soul than those of the body. And | ||||
often, when I see one of these men take this work in his hand, I | ||||
wonder that he does not put it to his nose, like a monkey, or ask me | ||||
if it is something good to eat. | ||||
[Footnote: In the original, the Proemio di prospettiva cioe | ||||
dell'uffitio dell'occhio (see No. 21) stands between this and the | ||||
preceding one, No. 9.] | ||||
INTRODUCTION. | ||||
I am fully concious that, not being a literary man, certain | ||||
presumptuous persons will think that they may reasonably blame me; | ||||
alleging that I am not a man of letters. Foolish folks! do they not | ||||
know that I might retort as Marius did to the Roman Patricians | ||||
[Footnote 21: _Come Mario disse ai patriti Romani_. "I am unable to | ||||
find the words here attributed by Leonardo to Marius, either in | ||||
Plutarch's Life of Marius or in the Apophthegmata (_Moralia_, | ||||
p.202). Nor do they occur in the writings of Valerius Maximus (who | ||||
frequently mentions Marius) nor in Velleius Paterculus (II, 11 to | ||||
43), Dio Cassius, Aulus Gellius, or Macrobius. Professor E. | ||||
MENDELSON of Dorpat, the editor of Herodian, assures me that no such | ||||
passage is the found in that author" (communication from Dr. MULLER | ||||
STRUBING). Leonardo evidently meant to allude to some well known | ||||
incident in Roman history and the mention of Marius is the result | ||||
probably of some confusion. We may perhaps read, for Marius, | ||||
Menenius Agrippa, though in that case it is true we must alter | ||||
Patriti to Plebei. The change is a serious one. but it would render | ||||
the passage perfectly clear.] by saying: That they, who deck | ||||
themselves out in the labours of others will not allow me my own. | ||||
They will say that I, having no literary skill, cannot properly | ||||
express that which I desire to treat of [Footnote 26: _le mie cose | ||||
.... che d'altra parola_. This can hardly be reconciled with Mons. | ||||
RAVAISSON'S estimate of L. da Vinci's learning. "_Leonard de Vinci | ||||
etait un admirateur et un disciple des anciens, aussi bien dans | ||||
l'art que dans la science et il tenait a passer pour tel meme aux | ||||
yeux de la posterite._" _Gaz. des Beaux arts. Oct. 1877.]; but they | ||||
do not know that my subjects are to be dealt with by experience | ||||
rather than by words [Footnote 28: See Footnote 26]; and | ||||
[experience] has been the mistress of those who wrote well. And so, | ||||
as mistress, I will cite her in all cases. | ||||
11. | ||||
Though I may not, like them, be able to quote other authors, I shall | ||||
rely on that which is much greater and more worthy:--on experience, | ||||
the mistress of their Masters. They go about puffed up and pompous, | ||||
dressed and decorated with [the fruits], not of their own labours, | ||||
but of those of others. And they will not allow me my own. They will | ||||
scorn me as an inventor; but how much more might they--who are not | ||||
inventors but vaunters and declaimers of the works of others--be | ||||
blamed. | ||||
INTRODUCTION. | ||||
And those men who are inventors and interpreters between Nature and | ||||
Man, as compared with boasters and declaimers of the works of | ||||
others, must be regarded and not otherwise esteemed than as the | ||||
object in front of a mirror, when compared with its image seen in | ||||
the mirror. For the first is something in itself, and the other | ||||
nothingness.--Folks little indebted to Nature, since it is only by | ||||
chance that they wear the human form and without it I might class | ||||
them with the herds of beasts. | ||||
12. | ||||
Many will think they may reasonably blame me by alleging that my | ||||
proofs are opposed to the authority of certain men held in the | ||||
highest reverence by their inexperienced judgments; not considering | ||||
that my works are the issue of pure and simple experience, who is | ||||
the one true mistress. These rules are sufficient to enable you to | ||||
know the true from the false--and this aids men to look only for | ||||
things that are possible and with due moderation--and not to wrap | ||||
yourself in ignorance, a thing which can have no good result, so | ||||
that in despair you would give yourself up to melancholy. | ||||
13. | ||||
Among all the studies of natural causes and reasons Light chiefly | ||||
delights the beholder; and among the great features of Mathematics | ||||
the certainty of its demonstrations is what preeminently (tends to) | ||||
elevate the mind of the investigator. Perspective, therefore, must | ||||
be preferred to all the discourses and systems of human learning. In | ||||
this branch [of science] the beam of light is explained on those | ||||
methods of demonstration which form the glory not so much of | ||||
Mathematics as of Physics and are graced with the flowers of both | ||||
[Footnote: 5. Such of Leonardo's notes on Optics or on Perspective | ||||
as bear exclusively on Mathematics or Physics could not be included | ||||
in the arrangement of the _libro di pittura_ which is here presented | ||||
to the reader. They are however but few.]. But its axioms being laid | ||||
down at great length, I shall abridge them to a conclusive brevity, | ||||
arranging them on the method both of their natural order and of | ||||
mathematical demonstration; sometimes by deduction of the effects | ||||
from the causes, and sometimes arguing the causes from the effects; | ||||
adding also to my own conclusions some which, though not included in | ||||
them, may nevertheless be inferred from them. Thus, if the Lord--who | ||||
is the light of all things--vouchsafe to enlighten me, I will treat | ||||
of Light; wherefore I will divide the present work into 3 Parts | ||||
[Footnote: 10. In the middle ages--for instance, by ROGER BACON, by | ||||
VITELLONE, with whose works Leonardo was certainly familiar, and by | ||||
all the writers of the Renaissance Perspective and Optics were not | ||||
regarded as distinct sciences. Perspective, indeed, is in its widest | ||||
application the science of seeing. Although to Leonardo the two | ||||
sciences were clearly separate, it is not so as to their names; thus | ||||
we find axioms in Optics under the heading Perspective. According to | ||||
this arrangement of the materials for the theoretical portion of the | ||||
_libro di pittura_ propositions in Perspective and in Optics stand | ||||
side by side or occur alternately. Although this particular chapter | ||||
deals only with Optics, it is not improbable that the words _partiro | ||||
la presente opera in 3 parti_ may refer to the same division into | ||||
three sections which is spoken of in chapters 14 to 17.]. | ||||
The plan of the book on Painting (14--17). | ||||
14. | ||||
ON THE THREE BRANCHES OF PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
There are three branches of perspective; the first deals with the | ||||
reasons of the (apparent) diminution of objects as they recede from | ||||
the eye, and is known as Diminishing Perspective.--The second | ||||
contains the way in which colours vary as they recede from the eye. | ||||
The third and last is concerned with the explanation of how the | ||||
objects [in a picture] ought to be less finished in proportion as | ||||
they are remote (and the names are as follows): | ||||
Linear Perspective. The Perspective of Colour. The Perspective of | ||||
Disappearance. | ||||
[Footnote: 13. From the character of the handwriting I infer that | ||||
this passage was written before the year 1490.]. | ||||
15. | ||||
ON PAINTING AND PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
The divisions of Perspective are 3, as used in drawing; of these, | ||||
the first includes the diminution in size of opaque objects; the | ||||
second treats of the diminution and loss of outline in such opaque | ||||
objects; the third, of the diminution and loss of colour at long | ||||
distances. | ||||
[Footnote: The division is here the same as in the previous chapter | ||||
No. 14, and this is worthy of note when we connect it with the fact | ||||
that a space of about 20 years must have intervened between the | ||||
writing of the two passages.] | ||||
16. | ||||
THE DISCOURSE ON PAINTING. | ||||
Perspective, as bearing on drawing, is divided into three principal | ||||
sections; of which the first treats of the diminution in the size of | ||||
bodies at different distances. The second part is that which treats | ||||
of the diminution in colour in these objects. The third [deals with] | ||||
the diminished distinctness of the forms and outlines displayed by | ||||
the objects at various distances. | ||||
17. | ||||
ON THE SECTIONS OF [THE BOOK ON] PAINTING. | ||||
The first thing in painting is that the objects it represents should | ||||
appear in relief, and that the grounds surrounding them at different | ||||
distances shall appear within the vertical plane of the foreground | ||||
of the picture by means of the 3 branches of Perspective, which are: | ||||
the diminution in the distinctness of the forms of the objects, the | ||||
diminution in their magnitude; and the diminution in their colour. | ||||
And of these 3 classes of Perspective the first results from [the | ||||
structure of] the eye, while the other two are caused by the | ||||
atmosphere which intervenes between the eye and the objects seen by | ||||
it. The second essential in painting is appropriate action and a due | ||||
variety in the figures, so that the men may not all look like | ||||
brothers, &c. | ||||
[Footnote: This and the two foregoing chapters must have been | ||||
written in 1513 to 1516. They undoubtedly indicate the scheme which | ||||
Leonardo wished to carry out in arranging his researches on | ||||
Perspective as applied to Painting. This is important because it is | ||||
an evidence against the supposition of H. LUDWIG and others, that | ||||
Leonardo had collected his principles of Perspective in one book so | ||||
early as before 1500; a Book which, according to the hypothesis, | ||||
must have been lost at a very early period, or destroyed possibly, | ||||
by the French (!) in 1500 (see H. LUDWIG. L. da Vinci: _Das Buch van | ||||
der Malerei_. Vienna 1882 III, 7 and 8).] | ||||
The use of the book on Painting. | ||||
18. | ||||
These rules are of use only in correcting the figures; since every | ||||
man makes some mistakes in his first compositions and he who knows | ||||
them not, cannot amend them. But you, knowing your errors, will | ||||
correct your works and where you find mistakes amend them, and | ||||
remember never to fall into them again. But if you try to apply | ||||
these rules in composition you will never make an end, and will | ||||
produce confusion in your works. | ||||
These rules will enable you to have a free and sound judgment; since | ||||
good judgment is born of clear understanding, and a clear | ||||
understanding comes of reasons derived from sound rules, and sound | ||||
rules are the issue of sound experience--the common mother of all | ||||
the sciences and arts. Hence, bearing in mind the precepts of my | ||||
rules, you will be able, merely by your amended judgment, to | ||||
criticise and recognise every thing that is out of proportion in a | ||||
work, whether in the perspective or in the figures or any thing | ||||
else. | ||||
Necessity of theoretical knowledge (19. 20). | ||||
19. | ||||
OF THE MISTAKES MADE BY THOSE WHO PRACTISE WITHOUT KNOWLEDGE. | ||||
Those who are in love with practice without knowledge are like the | ||||
sailor who gets into a ship without rudder or compass and who never | ||||
can be certain whether he is going. Practice must always be founded | ||||
on sound theory, and to this Perspective is the guide and the | ||||
gateway; and without this nothing can be done well in the matter of | ||||
drawing. | ||||
20. | ||||
The painter who draws merely by practice and by eye, without any | ||||
reason, is like a mirror which copies every thing placed in front of | ||||
it without being conscious of their existence. | ||||
The function of the eye (21-23). | ||||
21. | ||||
INTRODUCTION TO PERSPECTIVE:--THAT IS OF THE FUNCTION OF THE EYE. | ||||
Behold here O reader! a thing concerning which we cannot trust our | ||||
forefathers, the ancients, who tried to define what the Soul and | ||||
Life are--which are beyond proof, whereas those things, which can at | ||||
any time be clearly known and proved by experience, remained for | ||||
many ages unknown or falsely understood. The eye, whose function we | ||||
so certainly know by experience, has, down to my own time, been | ||||
defined by an infinite number of authors as one thing; but I find, | ||||
by experience, that it is quite another. [Footnote 13: Compare the | ||||
note to No. 70.] | ||||
[Footnote: In section 13 we already find it indicated that the study | ||||
of Perspective and of Optics is to be based on that of the functions | ||||
of the eye. Leonardo also refers to the science of the eye, in his | ||||
astronomical researches, for instance in MS. F 25b '_Ordine del | ||||
provare la terra essere una stella: Imprima difinisce l'occhio'_, | ||||
&c. Compare also MS. E 15b and F 60b. The principles of astronomical | ||||
perspective.] | ||||
22. | ||||
Here [in the eye] forms, here colours, here the character of every | ||||
part of the universe are concentrated to a point; and that point is | ||||
so marvellous a thing ... Oh! marvellous, O stupendous Necessity--by | ||||
thy laws thou dost compel every effect to be the direct result of | ||||
its cause, by the shortest path. These [indeed] are miracles;... | ||||
In so small a space it can be reproduced and rearranged in its whole | ||||
expanse. Describe in your anatomy what proportion there is between | ||||
the diameters of all the images in the eye and the distance from | ||||
them of the crystalline lens. | ||||
23. | ||||
OF THE 10 ATTRIBUTES OF THE EYE, ALL CONCERNED IN PAINTING. | ||||
Painting is concerned with all the 10 attributes of sight; which | ||||
are:--Darkness, Light, Solidity and Colour, Form and Position, | ||||
Distance and Propinquity, Motion and Rest. This little work of mine | ||||
will be a tissue [of the studies] of these attributes, reminding the | ||||
painter of the rules and methods by which he should use his art to | ||||
imitate all the works of Nature which adorn the world. | ||||
24. | ||||
ON PAINTING. | ||||
Variability of the eye. | ||||
1st. The pupil of the eye contracts, in proportion to the increase | ||||
of light which is reflected in it. 2nd. The pupil of the eye expands | ||||
in proportion to the diminution in the day light, or any other | ||||
light, that is reflected in it. 3rd. [Footnote: 8. The subject of | ||||
this third proposition we find fully discussed in MS. G. 44a.]. The | ||||
eye perceives and recognises the objects of its vision with greater | ||||
intensity in proportion as the pupil is more widely dilated; and | ||||
this can be proved by the case of nocturnal animals, such as cats, | ||||
and certain birds--as the owl and others--in which the pupil varies | ||||
in a high degree from large to small, &c., when in the dark or in | ||||
the light. 4th. The eye [out of doors] in an illuminated atmosphere | ||||
sees darkness behind the windows of houses which [nevertheless] are | ||||
light. 5th. All colours when placed in the shade appear of an equal | ||||
degree of darkness, among themselves. 6th. But all colours when | ||||
placed in a full light, never vary from their true and essential | ||||
hue. | ||||
25. | ||||
OF THE EYE. | ||||
Focus of sight. | ||||
If the eye is required to look at an object placed too near to it, | ||||
it cannot judge of it well--as happens to a man who tries to see the | ||||
tip of his nose. Hence, as a general rule, Nature teaches us that an | ||||
object can never be seen perfectly unless the space between it and | ||||
the eye is equal, at least, to the length of the face. | ||||
Differences of perception by one eye and by both eyes (26-29). | ||||
26. | ||||
OF THE EYE. | ||||
When both eyes direct the pyramid of sight to an object, that object | ||||
becomes clearly seen and comprehended by the eyes. | ||||
27. | ||||
Objects seen by one and the same eye appear sometimes large, and | ||||
sometimes small. | ||||
28. | ||||
The motion of a spectator who sees an object at rest often makes it | ||||
seem as though the object at rest had acquired the motion of the | ||||
moving body, while the moving person appears to be at rest. | ||||
ON PAINTING. | ||||
Objects in relief, when seen from a short distance with one eye, | ||||
look like a perfect picture. If you look with the eye _a_, _b_ at | ||||
the spot _c_, this point _c_ will appear to be at _d_, _f_, and if | ||||
you look at it with the eye _g_, _h_ will appear to be at _m_. A | ||||
picture can never contain in itself both aspects. | ||||
29. | ||||
Let the object in relief _t_ be seen by both eyes; if you will look | ||||
at the object with the right eye _m_, keeping the left eye _n_ shut, | ||||
the object will appear, or fill up the space, at _a_; and if you | ||||
shut the right eye and open the left, the object (will occupy the) | ||||
space _b_; and if you open both eyes, the object will no longer | ||||
appear at _a_ or _b_, but at _e_, _r_, _f_. Why will not a picture | ||||
seen by both eyes produce the effect of relief, as [real] relief | ||||
does when seen by both eyes; and why should a picture seen with one | ||||
eye give the same effect of relief as real relief would under the | ||||
same conditions of light and shade? | ||||
[Footnote: In the sketch, _m_ is the left eye and _n_ the right, | ||||
while the text reverses this lettering. We must therefore suppose | ||||
that the face in which the eyes _m_ and _n_ are placed is opposite | ||||
to the spectator.] | ||||
30. | ||||
The comparative size of the image depends on the amount of light | ||||
(30-39). | ||||
The eye will hold and retain in itself the image of a luminous body | ||||
better than that of a shaded object. The reason is that the eye is | ||||
in itself perfectly dark and since two things that are alike cannot | ||||
be distinguished, therefore the night, and other dark objects cannot | ||||
be seen or recognised by the eye. Light is totally contrary and | ||||
gives more distinctness, and counteracts and differs from the usual | ||||
darkness of the eye, hence it leaves the impression of its image. | ||||
31. | ||||
Every object we see will appear larger at midnight than at midday, | ||||
and larger in the morning than at midday. | ||||
This happens because the pupil of the eye is much smaller at midday | ||||
than at any other time. | ||||
32. | ||||
The pupil which is largest will see objects the largest. This is | ||||
evident when we look at luminous bodies, and particularly at those | ||||
in the sky. When the eye comes out of darkness and suddenly looks up | ||||
at these bodies, they at first appear larger and then diminish; and | ||||
if you were to look at those bodies through a small opening, you | ||||
would see them smaller still, because a smaller part of the pupil | ||||
would exercise its function. | ||||
[Footnote: 9. _buso_ in the Lomb. dialect is the same as _buco_.] | ||||
33. | ||||
When the eye, coming out of darkness suddenly sees a luminous body, | ||||
it will appear much larger at first sight than after long looking at | ||||
it. The illuminated object will look larger and more brilliant, when | ||||
seen with two eyes than with only one. A luminous object will appear | ||||
smaller in size, when the eye sees it through a smaller opening. A | ||||
luminous body of an oval form will appear rounder in proportion as | ||||
it is farther from the eye. | ||||
34. | ||||
Why when the eye has just seen the light, does the half light look | ||||
dark to it, and in the same way if it turns from the darkness the | ||||
half light look very bright? | ||||
35. | ||||
ON PAINTING. | ||||
If the eye, when [out of doors] in the luminous atmosphere, sees a | ||||
place in shadow, this will look very much darker than it really is. | ||||
This happens only because the eye when out in the air contracts the | ||||
pupil in proportion as the atmosphere reflected in it is more | ||||
luminous. And the more the pupil contracts, the less luminous do the | ||||
objects appear that it sees. But as soon as the eye enters into a | ||||
shady place the darkness of the shadow suddenly seems to diminish. | ||||
This occurs because the greater the darkness into which the pupil | ||||
goes the more its size increases, and this increase makes the | ||||
darkness seem less. | ||||
[Footnote 14: _La luce entrera_. _Luce_ occurs here in the sense of | ||||
pupil of the eye as in no 51: C. A. 84b; 245a; I--5; and in many | ||||
other places.] | ||||
36. | ||||
ON PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
The eye which turns from a white object in the light of the sun and | ||||
goes into a less fully lighted place will see everything as dark. | ||||
And this happens either because the pupils of the eyes which have | ||||
rested on this brilliantly lighted white object have contracted so | ||||
much that, given at first a certain extent of surface, they will | ||||
have lost more than 3/4 of their size; and, lacking in size, they | ||||
are also deficient in [seeing] power. Though you might say to me: A | ||||
little bird (then) coming down would see comparatively little, and | ||||
from the smallness of his pupils the white might seem black! To this | ||||
I should reply that here we must have regard to the proportion of | ||||
the mass of that portion of the brain which is given up to the sense | ||||
of sight and to nothing else. Or--to return--this pupil in Man | ||||
dilates and contracts according to the brightness or darkness of | ||||
(surrounding) objects; and since it takes some time to dilate and | ||||
contract, it cannot see immediately on going out of the light and | ||||
into the shade, nor, in the same way, out of the shade into the | ||||
light, and this very thing has already deceived me in painting an | ||||
eye, and from that I learnt it. | ||||
37. | ||||
Experiment [showing] the dilatation and contraction of the pupil, | ||||
from the motion of the sun and other luminaries. In proportion as | ||||
the sky is darker the stars appear of larger size, and if you were | ||||
to light up the medium these stars would look smaller; and this | ||||
difference arises solely from the pupil which dilates and contracts | ||||
with the amount of light in the medium which is interposed between | ||||
the eye and the luminous body. Let the experiment be made, by | ||||
placing a candle above your head at the same time that you look at a | ||||
star; then gradually lower the candle till it is on a level with the | ||||
ray that comes from the star to the eye, and then you will see the | ||||
star diminish so much that you will almost lose sight of it. | ||||
[Footnote: No reference is made in the text to the letters on the | ||||
accompanying diagram.] | ||||
38. | ||||
The pupil of the eye, in the open air, changes in size with every | ||||
degree of motion from the sun; and at every degree of its changes | ||||
one and the same object seen by it will appear of a different size; | ||||
although most frequently the relative scale of surrounding objects | ||||
does not allow us to detect these variations in any single object we | ||||
may look at. | ||||
39. | ||||
The eye--which sees all objects reversed--retains the images for | ||||
some time. This conclusion is proved by the results; because, the | ||||
eye having gazed at light retains some impression of it. After | ||||
looking (at it) there remain in the eye images of intense | ||||
brightness, that make any less brilliant spot seem dark until the | ||||
eye has lost the last trace of the impression of the stronger light. | ||||
_II. | ||||
Linear Perspective. | ||||
We see clearly from the concluding sentence of section 49, where the | ||||
author directly addresses the painter, that he must certainly have | ||||
intended to include the elements of mathematics in his Book on the | ||||
art of Painting. They are therefore here placed at the beginning. In | ||||
section 50 the theory of the "Pyramid of Sight" is distinctly and | ||||
expressly put forward as the fundamental principle of linear | ||||
perspective, and sections 52 to 57 treat of it fully. This theory of | ||||
sight can scarcely be traced to any author of antiquity. Such | ||||
passages as occur in Euclid for instance, may, it is true, have | ||||
proved suggestive to the painters of the Renaissance, but it would | ||||
be rash to say any thing decisive on this point. | ||||
Leon Battista Alberti treats of the "Pyramid of Sight" at some | ||||
length in his first Book of Painting; but his explanation differs | ||||
widely from Leonardo's in the details. Leonardo, like Alberti, may | ||||
have borrowed the broad lines of his theory from some views commonly | ||||
accepted among painters at the time; but he certainly worked out its | ||||
application in a perfectly original manner. | ||||
The axioms as to the perception of the pyramid of rays are followed | ||||
by explanations of its origin, and proofs of its universal | ||||
application (58--69). The author recurs to the subject with endless | ||||
variations; it is evidently of fundamental importance in his | ||||
artistic theory and practice. It is unnecessary to discuss how far | ||||
this theory has any scientific value at the present day; so much as | ||||
this, at any rate, seems certain: that from the artist's point of | ||||
view it may still claim to be of immense practical utility. | ||||
According to Leonardo, on one hand, the laws of perspective are an | ||||
inalienable condition of the existence of objects in space; on the | ||||
other hand, by a natural law, the eye, whatever it sees and wherever | ||||
it turns, is subjected to the perception of the pyramid of rays in | ||||
the form of a minute target. Thus it sees objects in perspective | ||||
independently of the will of the spectator, since the eye receives | ||||
the images by means of the pyramid of rays "just as a magnet | ||||
attracts iron". | ||||
In connection with this we have the function of the eye explained by | ||||
the Camera obscura, and this is all the more interesting and | ||||
important because no writer previous to Leonardo had treated of this | ||||
subject_ (70--73). _Subsequent passages, of no less special interest, | ||||
betray his knowledge of refraction and of the inversion of the image | ||||
in the camera and in the eye_ (74--82). | ||||
_From the principle of the transmission of the image to the eye and | ||||
to the camera obscura he deduces the means of producing an | ||||
artificial construction of the pyramid of rays or--which is the same | ||||
thing--of the image. The fundamental axioms as to the angle of sight | ||||
and the vanishing point are thus presented in a manner which is as | ||||
complete as it is simple and intelligible_ (86--89). | ||||
_Leonardo distinguishes between simple and complex perspective_ (90, | ||||
91). _The last sections treat of the apparent size of objects at | ||||
various distances and of the way to estimate it_ (92--109). | ||||
General remarks on perspective (40-41). | ||||
40. | ||||
ON PAINTING. | ||||
Perspective is the best guide to the art of Painting. | ||||
[Footnote: 40. Compare 53, 2.] | ||||
41. | ||||
The art of perspective is of such a nature as to make what is flat | ||||
appear in relief and what is in relief flat. | ||||
The elements of perspective--Of the Point (42-46). | ||||
42. | ||||
All the problems of perspective are made clear by the five terms of | ||||
mathematicians, which are:--the point, the line, the angle, the | ||||
superficies and the solid. The point is unique of its kind. And the | ||||
point has neither height, breadth, length, nor depth, whence it is | ||||
to be regarded as indivisible and as having no dimensions in space. | ||||
The line is of three kinds, straight, curved and sinuous and it has | ||||
neither breadth, height, nor depth. Hence it is indivisible, | ||||
excepting in its length, and its ends are two points. The angle is | ||||
the junction of two lines in a point. | ||||
43. | ||||
A point is not part of a line. | ||||
44. | ||||
OF THE NATURAL POINT. | ||||
The smallest natural point is larger than all mathematical points, | ||||
and this is proved because the natural point has continuity, and any | ||||
thing that is continuous is infinitely divisible; but the | ||||
mathematical point is indivisible because it has no size. | ||||
[Footnote: This definition was inserted by Leonardo on a MS. copy on | ||||
parchment of the well-known _"Trattato d'Architettura civile e | ||||
militare"_ &c. by FRANCESCO DI GIORGIO; opposite a passage where the | ||||
author says: _'In prima he da sapere che punto e quella parie della | ||||
quale he nulla--Linia he luncheza senza apieza; &c.] | ||||
45. | ||||
1, The superficies is a limitation of the body. 2, and the | ||||
limitation of a body is no part of that body. 4, and the limitation | ||||
of one body is that which begins another. 3, that which is not part | ||||
of any body is nothing. Nothing is that which fills no space. | ||||
If one single point placed in a circle may be the starting point of | ||||
an infinite number of lines, and the termination of an infinite | ||||
number of lines, there must be an infinite number of points | ||||
separable from this point, and these when reunited become one again; | ||||
whence it follows that the part may be equal to the whole. | ||||
46. | ||||
The point, being indivisible, occupies no space. That which occupies | ||||
no space is nothing. The limiting surface of one thing is the | ||||
beginning of another. 2. That which is no part of any body is called | ||||
nothing. 1. That which has no limitations, has no form. The | ||||
limitations of two conterminous bodies are interchangeably the | ||||
surface of each. All the surfaces of a body are not parts of that | ||||
body. | ||||
Of the line (47-48). | ||||
47. | ||||
DEFINITION OF THE NATURE OF THE LINE. | ||||
The line has in itself neither matter nor substance and may rather | ||||
be called an imaginary idea than a real object; and this being its | ||||
nature it occupies no space. Therefore an infinite number of lines | ||||
may be conceived of as intersecting each other at a point, which has | ||||
no dimensions and is only of the thickness (if thickness it may be | ||||
called) of one single line. | ||||
HOW WE MAY CONCLUDE THAT A SUPERFICIES TERMINATES IN A POINT? | ||||
An angular surface is reduced to a point where it terminates in an | ||||
angle. Or, if the sides of that angle are produced in a straight | ||||
line, then--beyond that angle--another surface is generated, | ||||
smaller, or equal to, or larger than the first. | ||||
48. | ||||
OF DRAWING OUTLINE. | ||||
Consider with the greatest care the form of the outlines of every | ||||
object, and the character of their undulations. And these | ||||
undulations must be separately studied, as to whether the curves are | ||||
composed of arched convexities or angular concavities. | ||||
49. | ||||
The nature of the outline. | ||||
The boundaries of bodies are the least of all things. The | ||||
proposition is proved to be true, because the boundary of a thing is | ||||
a surface, which is not part of the body contained within that | ||||
surface; nor is it part of the air surrounding that body, but is the | ||||
medium interposted between the air and the body, as is proved in its | ||||
place. But the lateral boundaries of these bodies is the line | ||||
forming the boundary of the surface, which line is of invisible | ||||
thickness. Wherefore O painter! do not surround your bodies with | ||||
lines, and above all when representing objects smaller than nature; | ||||
for not only will their external outlines become indistinct, but | ||||
their parts will be invisible from distance. | ||||
50. | ||||
Definition of Perspective. | ||||
[Drawing is based upon perspective, which is nothing else than a | ||||
thorough knowledge of the function of the eye. And this function | ||||
simply consists in receiving in a pyramid the forms and colours of | ||||
all the objects placed before it. I say in a pyramid, because there | ||||
is no object so small that it will not be larger than the spot where | ||||
these pyramids are received into the eye. Therefore, if you extend | ||||
the lines from the edges of each body as they converge you will | ||||
bring them to a single point, and necessarily the said lines must | ||||
form a pyramid.] | ||||
[Perspective is nothing more than a rational demonstration applied | ||||
to the consideration of how objects in front of the eye transmit | ||||
their image to it, by means of a pyramid of lines. The _Pyramid_ is | ||||
the name I apply to the lines which, starting from the surface and | ||||
edges of each object, converge from a distance and meet in a single | ||||
point.] | ||||
[Perspective is a rational demonstration, by which we may | ||||
practically and clearly understand how objects transmit their own | ||||
image, by lines forming a Pyramid (centred) in the eye.] | ||||
Perspective is a rational demonstration by which experience confirms | ||||
that every object sends its image to the eye by a pyramid of lines; | ||||
and bodies of equal size will result in a pyramid of larger or | ||||
smaller size, according to the difference in their distance, one | ||||
from the other. By a pyramid of lines I mean those which start from | ||||
the surface and edges of bodies, and, converging from a distance | ||||
meet in a single point. A point is said to be that which [having no | ||||
dimensions] cannot be divided, and this point placed in the eye | ||||
receives all the points of the cone. | ||||
[Footnote: 50. 1-5. Compare with this the Proem. No. 21. The | ||||
paragraphs placed in brackets: lines 1-9, 10-14, and 17--20, are | ||||
evidently mere sketches and, as such, were cancelled by the writer; | ||||
but they serve as a commentary on the final paragraph, lines 22-29.] | ||||
51. | ||||
IN WHAT WAY THE EYE SEES OBJECTS PLACED IN FRONT OF IT. | ||||
The perception of the object depends on the direction of the eye. | ||||
Supposing that the ball figured above is the ball of the eye and let | ||||
the small portion of the ball which is cut off by the line _s t_ be | ||||
the pupil and all the objects mirrored on the centre of the face of | ||||
the eye, by means of the pupil, pass on at once and enter the pupil, | ||||
passing through the crystalline humour, which does not interfere in | ||||
the pupil with the things seen by means of the light. And the pupil | ||||
having received the objects, by means of the light, immediately | ||||
refers them and transmits them to the intellect by the line _a b_. | ||||
And you must know that the pupil transmits nothing perfectly to the | ||||
intellect or common sense excepting when the objects presented to it | ||||
by means of light, reach it by the line _a b;_ as, for instance, by | ||||
the line _b c_. For although the lines _m n_ and _f g_ may be seen | ||||
by the pupil they are not perfectly taken in, because they do not | ||||
coincide with the line _a b_. And the proof is this: If the eye, | ||||
shown above, wants to count the letters placed in front, the eye | ||||
will be obliged to turn from letter to letter, because it cannot | ||||
discern them unless they lie in the line _a b;_ as, for instance, in | ||||
the line _a c_. All visible objects reach the eye by the lines of a | ||||
pyramid, and the point of the pyramid is the apex and centre of it, | ||||
in the centre of the pupil, as figured above. | ||||
[Footnote: 51. In this problem the eye is conceived of as fixed and | ||||
immovable; this is plain from line 11.] | ||||
Experimental proof of the existence of the pyramid of sight (52-55). | ||||
52. | ||||
Perspective is a rational demonstration, confirmed by experience, | ||||
that all objects transmit their image to the eye by a pyramid of | ||||
lines. | ||||
By a pyramid of lines I understand those lines which start from the | ||||
edges of the surface of bodies, and converging from a distance, meet | ||||
in a single point; and this point, in the present instance, I will | ||||
show to be situated in the eye which is the universal judge of all | ||||
objects. By a point I mean that which cannot be divided into parts; | ||||
therefore this point, which is situated in the eye, being | ||||
indivisible, no body is seen by the eye, that is not larger than | ||||
this point. This being the case it is inevitable that the lines | ||||
which come from the object to the point must form a pyramid. And if | ||||
any man seeks to prove that the sense of sight does not reside in | ||||
this point, but rather in the black spot which is visible in the | ||||
middle of the pupil, I might reply to him that a small object could | ||||
never diminish at any distance, as it might be a grain of millet or | ||||
of oats or of some similar thing, and that object, if it were larger | ||||
than the said [black] spot would never be seen as a whole; as may be | ||||
seen in the diagram below. Let _a_. be the seat of sight, _b e_ the | ||||
lines which reach the eye. Let _e d_ be the grains of millet within | ||||
these lines. You plainly see that these will never diminish by | ||||
distance, and that the body _m n_ could not be entirely covered by | ||||
it. Therefore you must confess that the eye contains within itself | ||||
one single indivisible point _a_, to which all the points converge | ||||
of the pyramid of lines starting from an object, as is shown below. | ||||
Let _a_. _b_. be the eye; in the centre of it is the point above | ||||
mentioned. If the line _e f_ is to enter as an image into so small | ||||
an opening in the eye, you must confess that the smaller object | ||||
cannot enter into what is smaller than itself unless it is | ||||
diminished, and by diminishing it must take the form of a pyramid. | ||||
53. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
Perspective comes in where judgment fails [as to the distance] in | ||||
objects which diminish. The eye can never be a true judge for | ||||
determining with exactitude how near one object is to another which | ||||
is equal to it [in size], if the top of that other is on the level | ||||
of the eye which sees them on that side, excepting by means of the | ||||
vertical plane which is the standard and guide of perspective. Let | ||||
_n_ be the eye, _e f_ the vertical plane above mentioned. Let _a b c | ||||
d_ be the three divisions, one below the other; if the lines _a n_ | ||||
and _c n_ are of a given length and the eye _n_ is in the centre, | ||||
then _a b_ will look as large as _b c. c d_ is lower and farther off | ||||
from _n_, therefore it will look smaller. And the same effect will | ||||
appear in the three divisions of a face when the eye of the painter | ||||
who is drawing it is on a level with the eye of the person he is | ||||
painting. | ||||
54. | ||||
TO PROVE HOW OBJECTS REACH THE EYE. | ||||
If you look at the sun or some other luminous body and then shut | ||||
your eyes you will see it again inside your eye for a long time. | ||||
This is evidence that images enter into the eye. | ||||
The relations of the distance points to the vanishing point (55-56). | ||||
55. | ||||
ELEMENTS OF PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
All objects transmit their image to the eye in pyramids, and the | ||||
nearer to the eye these pyramids are intersected the smaller will | ||||
the image appear of the objects which cause them. Therefore, you may | ||||
intersect the pyramid with a vertical plane [Footnote 4: _Pariete_. | ||||
Compare the definitions in 85, 2-5, 6-27. These lines refer | ||||
exclusively to the third diagram. For the better understanding of | ||||
this it should be observed that _c s_ must be regarded as | ||||
representing the section or profile of a square plane, placed | ||||
horizontally (comp. lines 11, 14, 17) for which the word _pianura_ | ||||
is subsequently employed (20, 22). Lines 6-13 contain certain | ||||
preliminary observations to guide the reader in understanding the | ||||
diagram; the last three seem to have been added as a supplement. | ||||
Leonardo's mistake in writing _t denota_ (line 6) for _f denota_ has | ||||
been rectified.] which reaches the base of the pyramid as is shown | ||||
in the plane _a n_. | ||||
The eye _f_ and the eye _t_ are one and the same thing; but the eye | ||||
_f_ marks the distance, that is to say how far you are standing from | ||||
the object; and the eye _t_ shows you the direction of it; that is | ||||
whether you are opposite, or on one side, or at an angle to the | ||||
object you are looking at. And remember that the eye _f_ and the eye | ||||
_t_ must always be kept on the same level. For example if you raise | ||||
or lower the eye from the distance point _f_ you must do the same | ||||
with the direction point _t_. And if the point _f_ shows how far the | ||||
eye is distant from the square plane but does not show on which side | ||||
it is placed--and, if in the same way, the point _t_ show _s_ the | ||||
direction and not the distance, in order to ascertain both you must | ||||
use both points and they will be one and the same thing. If the eye | ||||
_f_ could see a perfect square of which all the sides were equal to | ||||
the distance between _s_ and _c_, and if at the nearest end of the | ||||
side towards the eye a pole were placed, or some other straight | ||||
object, set up by a perpendicular line as shown at _r s_--then, I | ||||
say, that if you were to look at the side of the square that is | ||||
nearest to you it will appear at the bottom of the vertical plane _r | ||||
s_, and then look at the farther side and it would appear to you at | ||||
the height of the point _n_ on the vertical plane. Thus, by this | ||||
example, you can understand that if the eye is above a number of | ||||
objects all placed on the same level, one beyond another, the more | ||||
remote they are the higher they will seem, up to the level of the | ||||
eye, but no higher; because objects placed upon the level on which | ||||
your feet stand, so long as it is flat--even if it be extended into | ||||
infinity--would never be seen above the eye; since the eye has in | ||||
itself the point towards which all the cones tend and converge which | ||||
convey the images of the objects to the eye. And this point always | ||||
coincides with the point of diminution which is the extreme of all | ||||
we can see. And from the base line of the first pyramid as far as | ||||
the diminishing point | ||||
[Footnote: The two diagrams above the chapter are explained by the | ||||
first five lines. They have, however, more letters than are referred | ||||
to in the text, a circumstance we frequently find occasion to | ||||
remark.] | ||||
56. | ||||
there are only bases without pyramids which constantly diminish up | ||||
to this point. And from the first base where the vertical plane is | ||||
placed towards the point in the eye there will be only pyramids | ||||
without bases; as shown in the example given above. Now, let _a b_ | ||||
be the said vertical plane and _r_ the point of the pyramid | ||||
terminating in the eye, and _n_ the point of diminution which is | ||||
always in a straight line opposite the eye and always moves as the | ||||
eye moves--just as when a rod is moved its shadow moves, and moves | ||||
with it, precisely as the shadow moves with a body. And each point | ||||
is the apex of a pyramid, all having a common base with the | ||||
intervening vertical plane. But although their bases are equal their | ||||
angles are not equal, because the diminishing point is the | ||||
termination of a smaller angle than that of the eye. If you ask me: | ||||
"By what practical experience can you show me these points?" I | ||||
reply--so far as concerns the diminishing point which moves with you | ||||
--when you walk by a ploughed field look at the straight furrows | ||||
which come down with their ends to the path where you are walking, | ||||
and you will see that each pair of furrows will look as though they | ||||
tried to get nearer and meet at the [farther] end. | ||||
[Footnote: For the easier understanding of the diagram and of its | ||||
connection with the preceding I may here remark that the square | ||||
plane shown above in profile by the line _c s_ is here indicated by | ||||
_e d o p_. According to lines 1, 3 _a b_ must be imagined as a plane | ||||
of glass placed perpendicularly at _o p_.] | ||||
57. | ||||
How to measure the pyramid of vision. | ||||
As regards the point in the eye; it is made more intelligible by | ||||
this: If you look into the eye of another person you will see your | ||||
own image. Now imagine 2 lines starting from your ears and going to | ||||
the ears of that image which you see in the other man's eye; you | ||||
will understand that these lines converge in such a way that they | ||||
would meet in a point a little way beyond your own image mirrored in | ||||
the eye. And if you want to measure the diminution of the pyramid in | ||||
the air which occupies the space between the object seen and the | ||||
eye, you must do it according to the diagram figured below. Let _m | ||||
n_ be a tower, and _e f_ a, rod, which you must move backwards and | ||||
forwards till its ends correspond with those of the tower [Footnote | ||||
9: _I sua stremi .. della storre_ (its ends ... of the tower) this | ||||
is the case at _e f_.]; then bring it nearer to the eye, at _c d_ | ||||
and you will see that the image of the tower seems smaller, as at _r | ||||
o_. Then [again] bring it closer to the eye and you will see the rod | ||||
project far beyond the image of the tower from _a_ to _b_ and from | ||||
_t_ to _b_, and so you will discern that, a little farther within, | ||||
the lines must converge in a point. | ||||
The Production of pyramid of Vision (58-60). | ||||
58. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
The instant the atmosphere is illuminated it will be filled with an | ||||
infinite number of images which are produced by the various bodies | ||||
and colours assembled in it. And the eye is the target, a loadstone, | ||||
of these images. | ||||
59. | ||||
The whole surface of opaque bodies displays its whole image in all | ||||
the illuminated atmosphere which surrounds them on all sides. | ||||
60. | ||||
That the atmosphere attracts to itself, like a loadstone, all the | ||||
images of the objects that exist in it, and not their forms merely | ||||
but their nature may be clearly seen by the sun, which is a hot and | ||||
luminous body. All the atmosphere, which is the all-pervading | ||||
matter, absorbs light and heat, and reflects in itself the image of | ||||
the source of that heat and splendour and, in each minutest portion, | ||||
does the same. The Northpole does the same as the loadstone shows; | ||||
and the moon and the other planets, without suffering any | ||||
diminution, do the same. Among terrestrial things musk does the same | ||||
and other perfumes. | ||||
61. | ||||
All bodies together, and each by itself, give off to the surrounding | ||||
air an infinite number of images which are all-pervading and each | ||||
complete, each conveying the nature, colour and form of the body | ||||
which produces it. | ||||
It can clearly be shown that all bodies are, by their images, | ||||
all-pervading in the surrounding atmosphere, and each complete in | ||||
itself as to substance form and colour; this is seen by the images | ||||
of the various bodies which are reproduced in one single perforation | ||||
through which they transmit the objects by lines which intersect and | ||||
cause reversed pyramids, from the objects, so that they are upside | ||||
down on the dark plane where they are first reflected. The reason of | ||||
this is-- | ||||
[Footnote: The diagram intended to illustrate the statement (Pl. II | ||||
No. i) occurs in the original between lines 3 and 4. The three | ||||
circles must be understood to represent three luminous bodies which | ||||
transmit their images through perforations in a wall into a dark | ||||
chamber, according to a law which is more fully explained in 75?81. | ||||
So far as concerns the present passage the diagram is only intended | ||||
to explain that the images of the three bodies may be made to | ||||
coalesce at any given spot. In the circles are written, | ||||
giallo--yellow, biacho--white, rosso--red. | ||||
The text breaks off at line 8. The paragraph No.40 follows here in | ||||
the original MS.] | ||||
62. | ||||
Every point is the termination of an infinite number of lines, which | ||||
diverge to form a base, and immediately, from the base the same | ||||
lines converge to a pyramid [imaging] both the colour and form. No | ||||
sooner is a form created or compounded than suddenly infinite lines | ||||
and angles are produced from it; and these lines, distributing | ||||
themselves and intersecting each other in the air, give rise to an | ||||
infinite number of angles opposite to each other. Given a base, each | ||||
opposite angle, will form a triangle having a form and proportion | ||||
equal to the larger angle; and if the base goes twice into each of | ||||
the 2 lines of the pyramid the smaller triangle will do the same. | ||||
63. | ||||
Every body in light and shade fills the surrounding air with | ||||
infinite images of itself; and these, by infinite pyramids diffused | ||||
in the air, represent this body throughout space and on every side. | ||||
Each pyramid that is composed of a long assemblage of rays includes | ||||
within itself an infinite number of pyramids and each has the same | ||||
power as all, and all as each. A circle of equidistant pyramids of | ||||
vision will give to their object angles of equal size; and an eye at | ||||
each point will see the object of the same size. The body of the | ||||
atmosphere is full of infinite pyramids composed of radiating | ||||
straight lines, which are produced from the surface of the bodies in | ||||
light and shade, existing in the air; and the farther they are from | ||||
the object which produces them the more acute they become and | ||||
although in their distribution they intersect and cross they never | ||||
mingle together, but pass through all the surrounding air, | ||||
independently converging, spreading, and diffused. And they are all | ||||
of equal power [and value]; all equal to each, and each equal to | ||||
all. By these the images of objects are transmitted through all | ||||
space and in every direction, and each pyramid, in itself, includes, | ||||
in each minutest part, the whole form of the body causing it. | ||||
64. | ||||
The body of the atmosphere is full of infinite radiating pyramids | ||||
produced by the objects existing in it. These intersect and cross | ||||
each other with independent convergence without interfering with | ||||
each other and pass through all the surrounding atmosphere; and are | ||||
of equal force and value--all being equal to each, each to all. And | ||||
by means of these, images of the body are transmitted everywhere and | ||||
on all sides, and each receives in itself every minutest portion of | ||||
the object that produces it. | ||||
Proof by experiment (65-66). | ||||
65. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
The air is filled with endless images of the objects distributed in | ||||
it; and all are represented in all, and all in one, and all in each, | ||||
whence it happens that if two mirrors are placed in such a manner as | ||||
to face each other exactly, the first will be reflected in the | ||||
second and the second in the first. The first being reflected in the | ||||
second takes to it the image of itself with all the images | ||||
represented in it, among which is the image of the second mirror, | ||||
and so, image within image, they go on to infinity in such a manner | ||||
as that each mirror has within it a mirror, each smaller than the | ||||
last and one inside the other. Thus, by this example, it is clearly | ||||
proved that every object sends its image to every spot whence the | ||||
object itself can be seen; and the converse: That the same object | ||||
may receive in itself all the images of the objects that are in | ||||
front of it. Hence the eye transmits through the atmosphere its own | ||||
image to all the objects that are in front of it and receives them | ||||
into itself, that is to say on its surface, whence they are taken in | ||||
by the common sense, which considers them and if they are pleasing | ||||
commits them to the memory. Whence I am of opinion: That the | ||||
invisible images in the eyes are produced towards the object, as the | ||||
image of the object to the eye. That the images of the objects must | ||||
be disseminated through the air. An instance may be seen in several | ||||
mirrors placed in a circle, which will reflect each other endlessly. | ||||
When one has reached the other it is returned to the object that | ||||
produced it, and thence--being diminished--it is returned again to | ||||
the object and then comes back once more, and this happens | ||||
endlessly. If you put a light between two flat mirrors with a | ||||
distance of 1 braccio between them you will see in each of them an | ||||
infinite number of lights, one smaller than another, to the last. If | ||||
at night you put a light between the walls of a room, all the parts | ||||
of that wall will be tinted with the image of that light. And they | ||||
will receive the light and the light will fall on them, mutually, | ||||
that is to say, when there is no obstacle to interrupt the | ||||
transmission of the images. This same example is seen in a greater | ||||
degree in the distribution of the solar rays which all together, and | ||||
each by itself, convey to the object the image of the body which | ||||
causes it. That each body by itself alone fills with its images the | ||||
atmosphere around it, and that the same air is able, at the same | ||||
time, to receive the images of the endless other objects which are | ||||
in it, this is clearly proved by these examples. And every object is | ||||
everywhere visible in the whole of the atmosphere, and the whole in | ||||
every smallest part of it; and all the objects in the whole, and all | ||||
in each smallest part; each in all and all in every part. | ||||
66. | ||||
The images of objects are all diffused through the atmosphere which | ||||
receives them; and all on every side in it. To prove this, let _a c | ||||
e_ be objects of which the images are admitted to a dark chamber by | ||||
the small holes _n p_ and thrown upon the plane _f i_ opposite to | ||||
these holes. As many images will be produced in the chamber on the | ||||
plane as the number of the said holes. | ||||
67. | ||||
General conclusions. | ||||
All objects project their whole image and likeness, diffused and | ||||
mingled in the whole of the atmosphere, opposite to themselves. The | ||||
image of every point of the bodily surface, exists in every part of | ||||
the atmosphere. All the images of the objects are in every part of | ||||
the atmosphere. The whole, and each part of the image of the | ||||
atmosphere is [reflected] in each point of the surface of the bodies | ||||
presented to it. Therefore both the part and the whole of the images | ||||
of the objects exist, both in the whole and in the parts of the | ||||
surface of these visible bodies. Whence we may evidently say that | ||||
the image of each object exists, as a whole and in every part, in | ||||
each part and in the whole interchangeably in every existing body. | ||||
As is seen in two mirrors placed opposite to each other. | ||||
68. | ||||
That the contrary is impossible. | ||||
It is impossible that the eye should project from itself, by visual | ||||
rays, the visual virtue, since, as soon as it opens, that front | ||||
portion [of the eye] which would give rise to this emanation would | ||||
have to go forth to the object and this it could not do without | ||||
time. And this being so, it could not travel so high as the sun in a | ||||
month's time when the eye wanted to see it. And if it could reach | ||||
the sun it would necessarily follow that it should perpetually | ||||
remain in a continuous line from the eye to the sun and should | ||||
always diverge in such a way as to form between the sun and the eye | ||||
the base and the apex of a pyramid. This being the case, if the eye | ||||
consisted of a million worlds, it would not prevent its being | ||||
consumed in the projection of its virtue; and if this virtue would | ||||
have to travel through the air as perfumes do, the winds would bent | ||||
it and carry it into another place. But we do [in fact] see the mass | ||||
of the sun with the same rapidity as [an object] at the distance of | ||||
a braccio, and the power of sight is not disturbed by the blowing of | ||||
the winds nor by any other accident. | ||||
[Footnote: The view here refuted by Leonardo was maintained among | ||||
others by Bramantino, Leonardo's Milanese contemporary. LOMAZZO | ||||
writes as follows in his Trattato dell' Arte della pittura &c. | ||||
(Milano 1584. Libr. V cp. XXI): Sovviemmi di aver gia letto in certi | ||||
scritti alcune cose di Bramantino milanese, celebratissimo pittore, | ||||
attenente alla prospettiva, le quali ho voluto riferire, e quasi | ||||
intessere in questo luogo, affinche sappiamo qual fosse l'opinione | ||||
di cosi chiaro e famoso pittore intorno alla prospettiva . . Scrive | ||||
Bramantino che la prospettiva e una cosa che contrafa il naturale, e | ||||
che cio si fa in tre modi | ||||
Circa il primo modo che si fa con ragione, per essere la cosa in | ||||
poche parole conclusa da Bramantino in maniera che giudico non | ||||
potersi dir meglio, contenendovi si tutta Parte del principio al | ||||
fine, io riferiro per appunto le proprie parole sue (cp. XXII, Prima | ||||
prospettiva di Bramantino). La prima prospettiva fa le cose di | ||||
punto, e l'altra non mai, e la terza piu appresso. Adunque la prima | ||||
si dimanda prospettiva, cioe ragione, la quale fa l'effetto dell' | ||||
occhio, facendo crescere e calare secondo gli effetti degli occhi. | ||||
Questo crescere e calare non procede della cosa propria, che in se | ||||
per esser lontana, ovvero vicina, per quello effetto non puo | ||||
crescere e sminuire, ma procede dagli effetti degli occhi, i quali | ||||
sono piccioli, e percio volendo vedere tanto gran cosa_, bisogna che | ||||
mandino fuora la virtu visiva, _la quale si dilata in tanta | ||||
larghezza, che piglia tutto quello che vuoi vedere, ed_ arrivando a | ||||
quella cosa la vede dove e: _e da lei agli occhi per quello circuito | ||||
fino all' occhio, e tutto quello termine e pieno di quella cosa_. | ||||
It is worthy of note that Leonardo had made his memorandum refuting | ||||
this view, at Milan in 1492] | ||||
69. | ||||
A parallel case. | ||||
Just as a stone flung into the water becomes the centre and cause of | ||||
many circles, and as sound diffuses itself in circles in the air: so | ||||
any object, placed in the luminous atmosphere, diffuses itself in | ||||
circles, and fills the surrounding air with infinite images of | ||||
itself. And is repeated, the whole every-where, and the whole in | ||||
every smallest part. This can be proved by experiment, since if you | ||||
shut a window that faces west and make a hole [Footnote: 6. Here the | ||||
text breaks off.] . . | ||||
[Footnote: Compare LIBRI, _Histoire des sciences mathematiques en | ||||
Italie_. Tome III, p. 43.] | ||||
The function of the eye as explained by the camera obscura (70. 71). | ||||
70. | ||||
If the object in front of the eye sends its image to the eye, the | ||||
eye, on the other hand, sends its image to the object, and no | ||||
portion whatever of the object is lost in the images it throws off, | ||||
for any reason either in the eye or the object. Therefore we may | ||||
rather believe it to be the nature and potency of our luminous | ||||
atmosphere which absorbs the images of the objects existing in it, | ||||
than the nature of the objects, to send their images through the | ||||
air. If the object opposite to the eye were to send its image to the | ||||
eye, the eye would have to do the same to the object, whence it | ||||
might seem that these images were an emanation. But, if so, it would | ||||
be necessary [to admit] that every object became rapidly smaller; | ||||
because each object appears by its images in the surrounding | ||||
atmosphere. That is: the whole object in the whole atmosphere, and | ||||
in each part; and all the objects in the whole atmosphere and all of | ||||
them in each part; speaking of that atmosphere which is able to | ||||
contain in itself the straight and radiating lines of the images | ||||
projected by the objects. From this it seems necessary to admit that | ||||
it is in the nature of the atmosphere, which subsists between the | ||||
objects, and which attracts the images of things to itself like a | ||||
loadstone, being placed between them. | ||||
PROVE HOW ALL OBJECTS, PLACED IN ONE POSITION, ARE ALL EVERYWHERE | ||||
AND ALL IN EACH PART. | ||||
I say that if the front of a building--or any open piazza or | ||||
field--which is illuminated by the sun has a dwelling opposite to | ||||
it, and if, in the front which does not face the sun, you make a | ||||
small round hole, all the illuminated objects will project their | ||||
images through that hole and be visible inside the dwelling on the | ||||
opposite wall which may be made white; and there, in fact, they will | ||||
be upside down, and if you make similar openings in several places | ||||
in the same wall you will have the same result from each. Hence the | ||||
images of the illuminated objects are all everywhere on this wall | ||||
and all in each minutest part of it. The reason, as we clearly know, | ||||
is that this hole must admit some light to the said dwelling, and | ||||
the light admitted by it is derived from one or many luminous | ||||
bodies. If these bodies are of various colours and shapes the rays | ||||
forming the images are of various colours and shapes, and so will | ||||
the representations be on the wall. | ||||
[Footnote: 70. 15--23. This section has already been published in the | ||||
"_Saggio delle Opere di Leonardo da Vinci_" Milan 1872, pp. 13, 14. | ||||
G. Govi observes upon it, that Leonardo is not to be regarded as the | ||||
inventor of the Camera obscura, but that he was the first to explain | ||||
by it the structure of the eye. An account of the Camera obscura | ||||
first occurs in CESARE CESARINI's Italian version of Vitruvius, pub. | ||||
1523, four years after Leonardo's death. Cesarini expressly names | ||||
Benedettino Don Papnutio as the inventor of the Camera obscura. In | ||||
his explanation of the function of the eye by a comparison with the | ||||
Camera obscura Leonardo was the precursor of G. CARDANO, Professor | ||||
of Medicine at Bologna (died 1576) and it appears highly probable | ||||
that this is, in fact, the very discovery which Leonardo ascribes to | ||||
himself in section 21 without giving any further details.] | ||||
71. | ||||
HOW THE IMAGES OF OBJECTS RECEIVED BY THE EYE INTERSECT WITHIN THE | ||||
CRYSTALLINE HUMOUR OF THE EYE. | ||||
An experiment, showing how objects transmit their images or | ||||
pictures, intersecting within the eye in the crystalline humour, is | ||||
seen when by some small round hole penetrate the images of | ||||
illuminated objects into a very dark chamber. Then, receive these | ||||
images on a white paper placed within this dark room and rather near | ||||
to the hole and you will see all the objects on the paper in their | ||||
proper forms and colours, but much smaller; and they will be upside | ||||
down by reason of that very intersection. These images being | ||||
transmitted from a place illuminated by the sun will seem actually | ||||
painted on this paper which must be extremely thin and looked at | ||||
from behind. And let the little perforation be made in a very thin | ||||
plate of iron. Let _a b e d e_ be the object illuminated by the sun | ||||
and _o r_ the front of the dark chamber in which is the said hole at | ||||
_n m_. Let _s t_ be the sheet of paper intercepting the rays of the | ||||
images of these objects upside down, because the rays being | ||||
straight, _a_ on the right hand becomes _k_ on the left, and _e_ on | ||||
the left becomes _f_ on the right; and the same takes place inside | ||||
the pupil. | ||||
[Footnote: This chapter is already known through a translation into | ||||
French by VENTURI. Compare his '_Essai sur les ouvrages | ||||
physico-mathematiques de L. da Vinci avec des fragments tires de ses | ||||
Manuscrits, apportes de l'Italie. Lu a la premiere classe de | ||||
l'Institut national des Sciences et Arts.' Paris, An V_ (1797).] | ||||
The practice of perspective (72. 73). | ||||
72. | ||||
In the practice of perspective the same rules apply to light and to | ||||
the eye. | ||||
73. | ||||
The object which is opposite to the pupil of the eye is seen by that | ||||
pupil and that which is opposite to the eye is seen by the pupil. | ||||
Refraction of the rays falling upon the eye (74. 75) | ||||
74. | ||||
The lines sent forth by the image of an object to the eye do not | ||||
reach the point within the eye in straight lines. | ||||
75. | ||||
If the judgment of the eye is situated within it, the straight lines | ||||
of the images are refracted on its surface because they pass through | ||||
the rarer to the denser medium. If, when you are under water, you | ||||
look at objects in the air you will see them out of their true | ||||
place; and the same with objects under water seen from the air. | ||||
The intersection of the rays (76-82). | ||||
76. | ||||
The inversion of the images. | ||||
All the images of objects which pass through a window [glass pane] | ||||
from the free outer air to the air confined within walls, are seen | ||||
on the opposite side; and an object which moves in the outer air | ||||
from east to west will seem in its shadow, on the wall which is | ||||
lighted by this confined air, to have an opposite motion. | ||||
77. | ||||
THE PRINCIPLE ON WHICH THE IMAGES OF BODIES PASS IN BETWEEN THE | ||||
MARGINS OF THE OPENINGS BY WHICH THEY ENTER. | ||||
What difference is there in the way in which images pass through | ||||
narrow openings and through large openings, or in those which pass | ||||
by the sides of shaded bodies? By moving the edges of the opening | ||||
through which the images are admitted, the images of immovable | ||||
objects are made to move. And this happens, as is shown in the 9th | ||||
which demonstrates: [Footnote 11: _per la 9a che dicie_. When | ||||
Leonardo refers thus to a number it serves to indicate marginal | ||||
diagrams; this can in some instances be distinctly proved. The ninth | ||||
sketch on the page W. L. 145 b corresponds to the middle sketch of | ||||
the three reproduced.] the images of any object are all everywhere, | ||||
and all in each part of the surrounding air. It follows that if one | ||||
of the edges of the hole by which the images are admitted to a dark | ||||
chamber is moved it cuts off those rays of the image that were in | ||||
contact with it and gets nearer to other rays which previously were | ||||
remote from it &c. | ||||
OF THE MOVEMENT OF THE EDGE AT THE RIGHT OR LEFT, OR THE UPPER, OR | ||||
LOWER EDGE. | ||||
If you move the right side of the opening the image on the left will | ||||
move [being that] of the object which entered on the right side of | ||||
the opening; and the same result will happen with all the other | ||||
sides of the opening. This can be proved by the 2nd of this which | ||||
shows: all the rays which convey the images of objects through the | ||||
air are straight lines. Hence, if the images of very large bodies | ||||
have to pass through very small holes, and beyond these holes | ||||
recover their large size, the lines must necessarily intersect. | ||||
[Footnote: 77. 2. In the first of the three diagrams Leonardo had | ||||
drawn only one of the two margins, et _m_.] | ||||
78. | ||||
Necessity has provided that all the images of objects in front of | ||||
the eye shall intersect in two places. One of these intersections is | ||||
in the pupil, the other in the crystalline lens; and if this were | ||||
not the case the eye could not see so great a number of objects as | ||||
it does. This can be proved, since all the lines which intersect do | ||||
so in a point. Because nothing is seen of objects excepting their | ||||
surface; and their edges are lines, in contradistinction to the | ||||
definition of a surface. And each minute part of a line is equal to | ||||
a point; for _smallest_ is said of that than which nothing can be | ||||
smaller, and this definition is equivalent to the definition of the | ||||
point. Hence it is possible for the whole circumference of a circle | ||||
to transmit its image to the point of intersection, as is shown in | ||||
the 4th of this which shows: all the smallest parts of the images | ||||
cross each other without interfering with each other. These | ||||
demonstrations are to illustrate the eye. No image, even of the | ||||
smallest object, enters the eye without being turned upside down; | ||||
but as it penetrates into the crystalline lens it is once more | ||||
reversed and thus the image is restored to the same position within | ||||
the eye as that of the object outside the eye. | ||||
79. | ||||
OF THE CENTRAL LINE OF THE EYE. | ||||
Only one line of the image, of all those that reach the visual | ||||
virtue, has no intersection; and this has no sensible dimensions | ||||
because it is a mathematical line which originates from a | ||||
mathematical point, which has no dimensions. | ||||
According to my adversary, necessity requires that the central line | ||||
of every image that enters by small and narrow openings into a dark | ||||
chamber shall be turned upside down, together with the images of the | ||||
bodies that surround it. | ||||
80. | ||||
AS TO WHETHER THE CENTRAL LINE OF THE IMAGE CAN BE INTERSECTED, OR | ||||
NOT, WITHIN THE OPENING. | ||||
It is impossible that the line should intersect itself; that is, | ||||
that its right should cross over to its left side, and so, its left | ||||
side become its right side. Because such an intersection demands two | ||||
lines, one from each side; for there can be no motion from right to | ||||
left or from left to right in itself without such extension and | ||||
thickness as admit of such motion. And if there is extension it is | ||||
no longer a line but a surface, and we are investigating the | ||||
properties of a line, and not of a surface. And as the line, having | ||||
no centre of thickness cannot be divided, we must conclude that the | ||||
line can have no sides to intersect each other. This is proved by | ||||
the movement of the line _a f_ to _a b_ and of the line _e b_ to _e | ||||
f_, which are the sides of the surface _a f e b_. But if you move | ||||
the line _a b_ and the line _e f_, with the frontends _a e_, to the | ||||
spot _c_, you will have moved the opposite ends _f b_ towards each | ||||
other at the point _d_. And from the two lines you will have drawn | ||||
the straight line _c d_ which cuts the middle of the intersection of | ||||
these two lines at the point _n_ without any intersection. For, you | ||||
imagine these two lines as having breadth, it is evident that by | ||||
this motion the first will entirely cover the other--being equal | ||||
with it--without any intersection, in the position _c d_. And this | ||||
is sufficient to prove our proposition. | ||||
81. | ||||
HOW THE INNUMERABLE RAYS FROM INNUMERABLE IMAGES CAN CONVERGE TO A | ||||
POINT. | ||||
Just as all lines can meet at a point without interfering with each | ||||
other--being without breadth or thickness--in the same way all the | ||||
images of surfaces can meet there; and as each given point faces the | ||||
object opposite to it and each object faces an opposite point, the | ||||
converging rays of the image can pass through the point and diverge | ||||
again beyond it to reproduce and re-magnify the real size of that | ||||
image. But their impressions will appear reversed--as is shown in | ||||
the first, above; where it is said that every image intersects as it | ||||
enters the narrow openings made in a very thin substance. | ||||
Read the marginal text on the other side. | ||||
In proportion as the opening is smaller than the shaded body, so | ||||
much less will the images transmitted through this opening intersect | ||||
each other. The sides of images which pass through openings into a | ||||
dark room intersect at a point which is nearer to the opening in | ||||
proportion as the opening is narrower. To prove this let _a b_ be an | ||||
object in light and shade which sends not its shadow but the image | ||||
of its darkened form through the opening _d e_ which is as wide as | ||||
this shaded body; and its sides _a b_, being straight lines (as has | ||||
been proved) must intersect between the shaded object and the | ||||
opening; but nearer to the opening in proportion as it is smaller | ||||
than the object in shade. As is shown, on your right hand and your | ||||
left hand, in the two diagrams _a_ _b_ _c_ _n_ _m_ _o_ where, the | ||||
right opening _d_ _e_, being equal in width to the shaded object _a_ | ||||
_b_, the intersection of the sides of the said shaded object occurs | ||||
half way between the opening and the shaded object at the point _c_. | ||||
But this cannot happen in the left hand figure, the opening _o_ | ||||
being much smaller than the shaded object _n_ _m_. | ||||
It is impossible that the images of objects should be seen between | ||||
the objects and the openings through which the images of these | ||||
bodies are admitted; and this is plain, because where the atmosphere | ||||
is illuminated these images are not formed visibly. | ||||
When the images are made double by mutually crossing each other they | ||||
are invariably doubly as dark in tone. To prove this let _d_ _e_ _h_ | ||||
be such a doubling which although it is only seen within the space | ||||
between the bodies in _b_ and _i_ this will not hinder its being | ||||
seen from _f_ _g_ or from _f_ _m_; being composed of the images _a_ | ||||
_b_ _i_ _k_ which run together in _d_ _e_ _h_. | ||||
[Footnote: 81. On the original diagram at the beginning of this | ||||
chapter Leonardo has written "_azurro_" (blue) where in the | ||||
facsimile I have marked _A_, and "_giallo_" (yellow) where _B_ | ||||
stands.] | ||||
[Footnote: 15--23. These lines stand between the diagrams I and III.] | ||||
[Footnote: 24--53. These lines stand between the diagrams I and II.] | ||||
[Footnote: 54--97 are written along the left side of diagram I.] | ||||
82. | ||||
An experiment showing that though the pupil may not be moved from | ||||
its position the objects seen by it may appear to move from their | ||||
places. | ||||
If you look at an object at some distance from you and which is | ||||
below the eye, and fix both your eyes upon it and with one hand | ||||
firmly hold the upper lid open while with the other you push up the | ||||
under lid--still keeping your eyes fixed on the object gazed at--you | ||||
will see that object double; one [image] remaining steady, and the | ||||
other moving in a contrary direction to the pressure of your finger | ||||
on the lower eyelid. How false the opinion is of those who say that | ||||
this happens because the pupil of the eye is displaced from its | ||||
position. | ||||
How the above mentioned facts prove that the pupil acts upside down | ||||
in seeing. | ||||
[Footnote: 82. 14--17. The subject indicated by these two headings is | ||||
fully discussed in the two chapters that follow them in the | ||||
original; but it did not seem to me appropriate to include them | ||||
here.] | ||||
Demostration of perspective by means of a vertical glass plane | ||||
(83-85). | ||||
83. | ||||
OF THE PLANE OF GLASS. | ||||
Perspective is nothing else than seeing place [or objects] behind a | ||||
plane of glass, quite transparent, on the surface of which the | ||||
objects behind that glass are to be drawn. These can be traced in | ||||
pyramids to the point in the eye, and these pyramids are intersected | ||||
on the glass plane. | ||||
84. | ||||
Pictorial perspective can never make an object at the same distance, | ||||
look of the same size as it appears to the eye. You see that the | ||||
apex of the pyramid _f c d_ is as far from the object _c_ _d_ as the | ||||
same point _f_ is from the object _a_ _b_; and yet _c_ _d_, which is | ||||
the base made by the painter's point, is smaller than _a_ _b_ which | ||||
is the base of the lines from the objects converging in the eye and | ||||
refracted at _s_ _t_, the surface of the eye. This may be proved by | ||||
experiment, by the lines of vision and then by the lines of the | ||||
painter's plumbline by cutting the real lines of vision on one and | ||||
the same plane and measuring on it one and the same object. | ||||
85. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
The vertical plane is a perpendicular line, imagined as in front of | ||||
the central point where the apex of the pyramids converge. And this | ||||
plane bears the same relation to this point as a plane of glass | ||||
would, through which you might see the various objects and draw them | ||||
on it. And the objects thus drawn would be smaller than the | ||||
originals, in proportion as the distance between the glass and the | ||||
eye was smaller than that between the glass and the objects. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
The different converging pyramids produced by the objects, will | ||||
show, on the plane, the various sizes and remoteness of the objects | ||||
causing them. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
All those horizontal planes of which the extremes are met by | ||||
perpendicular lines forming right angles, if they are of equal width | ||||
the more they rise to the level of eye the less this is seen, and | ||||
the more the eye is above them the more will their real width be | ||||
seen. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
The farther a spherical body is from the eye the more you will see | ||||
of it. | ||||
The angle of sight varies with the distance (86-88) | ||||
86. | ||||
A simple and natural method; showing how objects appear to the eye | ||||
without any other medium. | ||||
The object that is nearest to the eye always seems larger than | ||||
another of the same size at greater distance. The eye _m_, seeing | ||||
the spaces _o v x_, hardly detects the difference between them, and | ||||
the. reason of this is that it is close to them [Footnote 6: It is | ||||
quite inconceivable to me why M. RAVAISSON, in a note to his French | ||||
translation of this simple passage should have remarked: _Il est | ||||
clair que c'est par erreur que Leonard a ecrit_ per esser visino _au | ||||
lieu de_ per non esser visino. (See his printed ed. of MS. A. p. | ||||
38.)]; but if these spaces are marked on the vertical plane _n o_ | ||||
the space _o v_ will be seen at _o r_, and in the same way the space | ||||
_v x_ will appear at _r q_. And if you carry this out in any place | ||||
where you can walk round, it will look out of proportion by reason | ||||
of the great difference in the spaces _o r_ and _r q_. And this | ||||
proceeds from the eye being so much below [near] the plane that the | ||||
plane is foreshortened. Hence, if you wanted to carry it out, you | ||||
would have [to arrange] to see the perspective through a single hole | ||||
which must be at the point _m_, or else you must go to a distance of | ||||
at least 3 times the height of the object you see. The plane _o p_ | ||||
being always equally remote from the eye will reproduce the objects | ||||
in a satisfactory way, so that they may be seen from place to place. | ||||
87. | ||||
How every large mass sends forth its images, which may diminish | ||||
through infinity. | ||||
The images of any large mass being infinitely divisible may be | ||||
infinitely diminished. | ||||
88. | ||||
Objects of equal size, situated in various places, will be seen by | ||||
different pyramids which will each be smaller in proportion as the | ||||
object is farther off. | ||||
89. | ||||
Perspective, in dealing with distances, makes use of two opposite | ||||
pyramids, one of which has its apex in the eye and the base as | ||||
distant as the horizon. The other has the base towards the eye and | ||||
the apex on the horizon. Now, the first includes the [visible] | ||||
universe, embracing all the mass of the objects that lie in front of | ||||
the eye; as it might be a vast landscape seen through a very small | ||||
opening; for the more remote the objects are from the eye, the | ||||
greater number can be seen through the opening, and thus the pyramid | ||||
is constructed with the base on the horizon and the apex in the eye, | ||||
as has been said. The second pyramid is extended to a spot which is | ||||
smaller in proportion as it is farther from the eye; and this second | ||||
perspective [= pyramid] results from the first. | ||||
90. | ||||
SIMPLE PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
Simple perspective is that which is constructed by art on a vertical | ||||
plane which is equally distant from the eye in every part. Complex | ||||
perspective is that which is constructed on a ground-plan in which | ||||
none of the parts are equally distant from the eye. | ||||
91. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
No surface can be seen exactly as it is, if the eye that sees it is | ||||
not equally remote from all its edges. | ||||
92. | ||||
WHY WHEN AN OBJECT IS PLACED CLOSE TO THE EYE ITS EDGES ARE | ||||
INDISTINCT. | ||||
When an object opposite the eye is brought too close to it, its | ||||
edges must become too confused to be distinguished; as it happens | ||||
with objects close to a light, which cast a large and indistinct | ||||
shadow, so is it with an eye which estimates objects opposite to it; | ||||
in all cases of linear perspective, the eye acts in the same way as | ||||
the light. And the reason is that the eye has one leading line (of | ||||
vision) which dilates with distance and embraces with true | ||||
discernment large objects at a distance as well as small ones that | ||||
are close. But since the eye sends out a multitude of lines which | ||||
surround this chief central one and since these which are farthest | ||||
from the centre in this cone of lines are less able to discern with | ||||
accuracy, it follows that an object brought close to the eye is not | ||||
at a due distance, but is too near for the central line to be able | ||||
to discern the outlines of the object. So the edges fall within the | ||||
lines of weaker discerning power, and these are to the function of | ||||
the eye like dogs in the chase which can put up the game but cannot | ||||
take it. Thus these cannot take in the objects, but induce the | ||||
central line of sight to turn upon them, when they have put them up. | ||||
Hence the objects which are seen with these lines of sight have | ||||
confused outlines. | ||||
The relative size of objects with regard to their distance from the | ||||
eye (93-98). | ||||
93. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
Small objects close at hand and large ones at a distance, being seen | ||||
within equal angles, will appear of the same size. | ||||
94. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
There is no object so large but that at a great distance from the | ||||
eye it does not appear smaller than a smaller object near. | ||||
95. | ||||
Among objects of equal size that which is most remote from the eye | ||||
will look the smallest. [Footnote: This axiom, sufficiently clear in | ||||
itself, is in the original illustrated by a very large diagram, | ||||
constructed like that here reproduced under No. 108. | ||||
The same idea is repeated in C. A. I a; I a, stated as follows: | ||||
_Infra le cose d'equal grandeza quella si dimostra di minor figura | ||||
che sara piu distante dall' ochio_.--] | ||||
96. | ||||
Why an object is less distinct when brought near to the eye, and why | ||||
with spectacles, or without the naked eye sees badly either close or | ||||
far off [as the case may be]. | ||||
97. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
Among objects of equal size, that which is most remote from the eye | ||||
will look the smallest. | ||||
98. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
No second object can be so much lower than the first as that the eye | ||||
will not see it higher than the first, if the eye is above the | ||||
second. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
And this second object will never be so much higher than the first | ||||
as that the eye, being below them, will not see the second as lower | ||||
than the first. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
If the eye sees a second square through the centre of a smaller one, | ||||
that is nearer, the second, larger square will appear to be | ||||
surrounded by the smaller one. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE--PROPOSITION. | ||||
Objects that are farther off can never be so large but that those in | ||||
front, though smaller, will conceal or surround them. | ||||
DEFINITION. | ||||
This proposition can be proved by experiment. For if you look | ||||
through a small hole there is nothing so large that it cannot be | ||||
seen through it and the object so seen appears surrounded and | ||||
enclosed by the outline of the sides of the hole. And if you stop it | ||||
up, this small stopping will conceal the view of the largest object. | ||||
The apparent size of objects defined by calculation (99-105) | ||||
99. | ||||
OF LINEAR PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
Linear Perspective deals with the action of the lines of sight, in | ||||
proving by measurement how much smaller is a second object than the | ||||
first, and how much the third is smaller than the second; and so on | ||||
by degrees to the end of things visible. I find by experience that | ||||
if a second object is as far beyond the first as the first is from | ||||
the eye, although they are of the same size, the second will seem | ||||
half the size of the first and if the third object is of the same | ||||
size as the 2nd, and the 3rd is as far beyond the second as the 2nd | ||||
from the first, it will appear of half the size of the second; and | ||||
so on by degrees, at equal distances, the next farthest will be half | ||||
the size of the former object. So long as the space does not exceed | ||||
the length of 20 braccia. But, beyond 20 braccia figures of equal | ||||
size will lose 2/4 and at 40 braccia they will lose 9/10, and 19/20 | ||||
at 60 braccia, and so on diminishing by degrees. This is if the | ||||
picture plane is distant from you twice your own height. If it is | ||||
only as far off as your own height, there will be a great difference | ||||
between the first braccia and the second. | ||||
[Footnote: This chapter is included in DUFRESNE'S and MANZI'S | ||||
editions of the Treatise on Painting. H. LUDWIG, in his commentary, | ||||
calls this chapter "_eines der wichtigsten im ganzen Tractat_", but | ||||
at the same time he asserts that its substance has been so | ||||
completely disfigured in the best MS. copies that we ought not to | ||||
regard Leonardo as responsible for it. However, in the case of this | ||||
chapter, the old MS. copies agree with the original as it is | ||||
reproduced above. From the chapters given later in this edition, | ||||
which were written at a subsequent date, it would appear that | ||||
Leonardo corrected himself on these points.] | ||||
100. | ||||
OF THE DIMINUTION OF OBJECTS AT VARIOUS DISTANCES. | ||||
A second object as far distant from the first as the first is from | ||||
the eye will appear half the size of the first, though they be of | ||||
the same size really. | ||||
OF THE DEGREES OF DIMINUTION. | ||||
If you place the vertical plane at one braccio from the eye, the | ||||
first object, being at a distance of 4 braccia from your eye will | ||||
diminish to 3/4 of its height at that plane; and if it is 8 braccia | ||||
from the eye, to 7/8; and if it is 16 braccia off, it will diminish | ||||
to 15/16 of its height and so on by degrees, as the space doubles | ||||
the diminution will double. | ||||
101. | ||||
Begin from the line _m f_ with the eye below; then go up and do the | ||||
same with the line _n f_, then with the eye above and close to the 2 | ||||
gauges on the ground look at _m n_; then as _c m_ is to _m n_ so | ||||
will _n m_ be to _n s_. | ||||
If _a n_ goes 3 times into _f b, m p_ will do the same into _p g_. | ||||
Then go backwards so far as that _c d_ goes twice into _a n_ and _p | ||||
g_ will be equal to _g h_. And _m p_ will go into _h p_ as often as | ||||
_d c_ into _o p_. | ||||
[Footnote: The first three lines are unfortunately very obscure.] | ||||
102. | ||||
I GIVE THE DEGREES OF THE OBJECTS SEEN BY THE EYE AS THE MUSICIAN | ||||
DOES THE NOTES HEARD BY THE EAR. | ||||
Although the objects seen by the eye do, in fact, touch each other | ||||
as they recede, I will nevertheless found my rule on spaces of 20 | ||||
braccia each; as a musician does with notes, which, though they can | ||||
be carried on one into the next, he divides into degrees from note | ||||
to note calling them 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th; and has affixed a name | ||||
to each degree in raising or lowering the voice. | ||||
103. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
Let _f_ be the level and distance of the eye; and _a_ the vertical | ||||
plane, as high as a man; let _e_ be a man, then I say that on the | ||||
plane this will be the distance from the plane to the 2nd man. | ||||
104. | ||||
The differences in the diminution of objects of equal size in | ||||
consequence of their various remoteness from the eye will bear among | ||||
themselves the same proportions as those of the spaces between the | ||||
eye and the different objects. | ||||
Find out how much a man diminishes at a certain distance and what | ||||
its length is; and then at twice that distance and at 3 times, and | ||||
so make your general rule. | ||||
105. | ||||
The eye cannot judge where an object high up ought to descend. | ||||
106. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
If two similar and equal objects are placed one beyond the other at | ||||
a given distance the difference in their size will appear greater in | ||||
proportion as they are nearer to the eye that sees them. And | ||||
conversely there will seem to be less difference in their size in | ||||
proportion as they are remote from the eve. | ||||
This is proved by the proportions of their distances among | ||||
themselves; for, if the first of these two objects were as far from | ||||
the eye, as the 2nd from the first this would be called the second | ||||
proportion: since, if the first is at 1 braccia from the eye and the | ||||
2nd at two braccia, two being twice as much as one, the first object | ||||
will look twice as large as the second. But if you place the first | ||||
at a hundred braccia from you and the second at a hundred and one, | ||||
you will find that the first is only so much larger than the second | ||||
as 100 is less than 101; and the converse is equally true. And | ||||
again, the same thing is proved by the 4th of this book which shows | ||||
that among objects that are equal, there is the same proportion in | ||||
the diminution of the size as in the increase in the distance from | ||||
the eye of the spectator. | ||||
On natural perspective (107--109). | ||||
107. | ||||
OF EQUAL OBJECTS THE MOST REMOTE LOOK THE SMALLEST. | ||||
The practice of perspective may be divided into ... parts [Footnote | ||||
4: _in_ ... _parte_. The space for the number is left blank in the | ||||
original.], of which the first treats of objects seen by the eye at | ||||
any distance; and it shows all these objects just as the eye sees | ||||
them diminished, without obliging a man to stand in one place rather | ||||
than another so long as the plane does not produce a second | ||||
foreshortening. | ||||
But the second practice is a combination of perspective derived | ||||
partly from art and partly from nature and the work done by its | ||||
rules is in every portion of it, influenced by natural perspective | ||||
and artificial perspective. By natural perspective I mean that the | ||||
plane on which this perspective is represented is a flat surface, | ||||
and this plane, although it is parallel both in length and height, | ||||
is forced to diminish in its remoter parts more than in its nearer | ||||
ones. And this is proved by the first of what has been said above, | ||||
and its diminution is natural. But artificial perspective, that is | ||||
that which is devised by art, does the contrary; for objects equal | ||||
in size increase on the plane where it is foreshortened in | ||||
proportion as the eye is more natural and nearer to the plane, and | ||||
as the part of the plane on which it is figured is farther from the | ||||
eye. | ||||
And let this plane be _d e_ on which are seen 3 equal circles which | ||||
are beyond this plane _d e_, that is the circles _a b c_. Now you | ||||
see that the eye _h_ sees on the vertical plane the sections of the | ||||
images, largest of those that are farthest and smallest of the | ||||
nearest. | ||||
108. | ||||
Here follows what is wanting in the margin at the foot on the other | ||||
side of this page. | ||||
Natural perspective acts in a contrary way; for, at greater | ||||
distances the object seen appears smaller, and at a smaller distance | ||||
the object appears larger. But this said invention requires the | ||||
spectator to stand with his eye at a small hole and then, at that | ||||
small hole, it will be very plain. But since many (men's) eyes | ||||
endeavour at the same time to see one and the same picture produced | ||||
by this artifice only one can see clearly the effect of this | ||||
perspective and all the others will see confusion. It is well | ||||
therefore to avoid such complex perspective and hold to simple | ||||
perspective which does not regard planes as foreshortened, but as | ||||
much as possible in their proper form. This simple perspective, in | ||||
which the plane intersects the pyramids by which the images are | ||||
conveyed to the eye at an equal distance from the eye is our | ||||
constant experience, from the curved form of the pupil of the eye on | ||||
which the pyramids are intersected at an equal distance from the | ||||
visual virtue. | ||||
[Footnote 24: _la prima di sopra_ i. e. the first of the three | ||||
diagrams which, in the original MS., are placed in the margin at the | ||||
beginning of this chapter.] | ||||
109. | ||||
OF A MIXTURE OF NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
This diagram distinguishes natural from artificial perspective. But | ||||
before proceeding any farther I will define what is natural and what | ||||
is artificial perspective. Natural perspective says that the more | ||||
remote of a series of objects of equal size will look the smaller, | ||||
and conversely, the nearer will look the larger and the apparent | ||||
size will diminish in proportion to the distance. But in artificial | ||||
perspective when objects of unequal size are placed at various | ||||
distances, the smallest is nearer to the eye than the largest and | ||||
the greatest distance looks as though it were the least of all; and | ||||
the cause of this is the plane on which the objects are represented; | ||||
and which is at unequal distances from the eye throughout its | ||||
length. And this diminution of the plane is natural, but the | ||||
perspective shown upon it is artificial since it nowhere agrees with | ||||
the true diminution of the said plane. Whence it follows, that when | ||||
the eye is somewhat removed from the [station point of the] | ||||
perspective that it has been gazing at, all the objects represented | ||||
look monstrous, and this does not occur in natural perspective, | ||||
which has been defined above. Let us say then, that the square _a b | ||||
c d_ figured above is foreshortened being seen by the eye situated | ||||
in the centre of the side which is in front. But a mixture of | ||||
artificial and natural perspective will be seen in this tetragon | ||||
called _el main_ [Footnote 20: _el main_ is quite legibly written in | ||||
the original; the meaning and derivation of the word are equally | ||||
doubtful.], that is to say _e f g h_ which must appear to the eye of | ||||
the spectator to be equal to _a b c d_ so long as the eye remains in | ||||
its first position between _c_ and _d_. And this will be seen to | ||||
have a good effect, because the natural perspective of the plane | ||||
will conceal the defects which would [otherwise] seem monstrous. | ||||
_III._ | ||||
_Six books on Light and Shade._ | ||||
_Linear Perspective cannot be immediately followed by either the_ | ||||
"prospettiva de' perdimenti" _or the_ "prospettiva de' colori" _or | ||||
the aerial perspective; since these branches of the subject | ||||
presuppose a knowledge of the principles of Light and Shade. No | ||||
apology, therefore, is here needed for placing these immediately | ||||
after Linear Perspective._ | ||||
_We have various plans suggested by Leonardo for the arrangement of | ||||
the mass of materials treating of this subject. Among these I have | ||||
given the preference to a scheme propounded in No._ III, _because, | ||||
in all probability, we have here a final and definite purpose | ||||
expressed. Several authors have expressed it as their opinion that | ||||
the Paris Manuscript_ C _is a complete and finished treatise on | ||||
Light and Shade. Certainly, the Principles of Light and Shade form | ||||
by far the larger portion of this MS. which consists of two separate | ||||
parts; still, the materials are far from being finally arranged. It | ||||
is also evident that he here investigates the subject from the point | ||||
of view of the Physicist rather than from that of the Painter._ | ||||
_The plan of a scheme of arrangement suggested in No._ III _and | ||||
adopted by me has been strictly adhered to for the first four Books. | ||||
For the three last, however, few materials have come down to us; and | ||||
it must be admitted that these three Books would find a far more | ||||
appropriate place in a work on Physics than in a treatise on | ||||
Painting. For this reason I have collected in Book V all the | ||||
chapters on Reflections, and in Book VI I have put together and | ||||
arranged all the sections of MS._ C _that belong to the book on | ||||
Painting, so far as they relate to Light and Shade, while the | ||||
sections of the same MS. which treat of the_ "Prospettiva de' | ||||
perdimenti" _have, of course, been excluded from the series on Light | ||||
and Shade._ | ||||
[Footnote III: This text has already been published with some slight | ||||
variations in Dozio's pamphlet _Degli scritti e disegni di Leonardo | ||||
da Vinci_, Milan 1871, pp. 30--31. Dozio did not transcribe it from | ||||
the original MS. which seems to have remained unknown to him, but | ||||
from an old copy (MS. H. 227 in the Ambrosian Library).] | ||||
GENERAL INTRODUCTION. | ||||
Prolegomena. | ||||
110. | ||||
You must first explain the theory and then the practice. First you | ||||
must describe the shadows and lights on opaque objects, and then on | ||||
transparent bodies. | ||||
Scheme of the books on Light and shade. | ||||
111. | ||||
INTRODUCTION. | ||||
[Having already treated of the nature of shadows and the way in | ||||
which they are cast [Footnote 2: _Avendo io tractato._--We may | ||||
suppose that he here refers to some particular MS., possibly Paris | ||||
C.], I will now consider the places on which they fall; and their | ||||
curvature, obliquity, flatness or, in short, any character I may be | ||||
able to detect in them.] | ||||
Shadow is the obstruction of light. Shadows appear to me to be of | ||||
supreme importance in perspective, because, without them opaque and | ||||
solid bodies will be ill defined; that which is contained within | ||||
their outlines and their boundaries themselves will be | ||||
ill-understood unless they are shown against a background of a | ||||
different tone from themselves. And therefore in my first | ||||
proposition concerning shadow I state that every opaque body is | ||||
surrounded and its whole surface enveloped in shadow and light. And | ||||
on this proposition I build up the first Book. Besides this, shadows | ||||
have in themselves various degrees of darkness, because they are | ||||
caused by the absence of a variable amount of the luminous rays; and | ||||
these I call Primary shadows because they are the first, and | ||||
inseparable from the object to which they belong. And on this I will | ||||
found my second Book. From these primary shadows there result | ||||
certain shaded rays which are diffused through the atmosphere and | ||||
these vary in character according to that of the primary shadows | ||||
whence they are derived. I shall therefore call these shadows | ||||
Derived shadows because they are produced by other shadows; and the | ||||
third Book will treat of these. Again these derived shadows, where | ||||
they are intercepted by various objects, produce effects as various | ||||
as the places where they are cast and of this I will treat in the | ||||
fourth Book. And since all round the derived shadows, where the | ||||
derived shadows are intercepted, there is always a space where the | ||||
light falls and by reflected dispersion is thrown back towards its | ||||
cause, it meets the original shadow and mingles with it and modifies | ||||
it somewhat in its nature; and on this I will compose my fifth Book. | ||||
Besides this, in the sixth Book I will investigate the many and | ||||
various diversities of reflections resulting from these rays which | ||||
will modify the original [shadow] by [imparting] some of the various | ||||
colours from the different objects whence these reflected rays are | ||||
derived. Again, the seventh Book will treat of the various distances | ||||
that may exist between the spot where the reflected rays fall and | ||||
that where they originate, and the various shades of colour which | ||||
they will acquire in falling on opaque bodies. | ||||
Different principles and plans of treatment (112--116). | ||||
112. | ||||
First I will treat of light falling through windows which I will | ||||
call Restricted [Light] and then I will treat of light in the open | ||||
country, to which I will give the name of diffused Light. Then I | ||||
will treat of the light of luminous bodies. | ||||
113. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
The conditions of shadow and light [as seen] by the eye are 3. Of | ||||
these the first is when the eye and the light are on the same side | ||||
of the object seen; the 2nd is when the eye is in front of the | ||||
object and the light is behind it. The 3rd is when the eye is in | ||||
front of the object and the light is on one side, in such a way as | ||||
that a line drawn from the object to the eye and one from the object | ||||
to the light should form a right angle where they meet. | ||||
114. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
This is another section: that is, of the nature of a reflection | ||||
(from) an object placed between the eye and the light under various | ||||
aspects. | ||||
115. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
As regards all visible objects 3 things must be considered. These | ||||
are the position of the eye which sees: that of the object seen | ||||
[with regard] to the light, and the position of the light which | ||||
illuminates the object, _b_ is the eye, _a_ the object seen, _c_ the | ||||
light, _a_ is the eye, _b_ the illuminating body, _c_ is the | ||||
illuminated object. | ||||
116. | ||||
Let _a_ be the light, _b_ the eye, _c_ the object seen by the eye | ||||
and in the light. These show, first, the eye between the light and | ||||
the body; the 2nd, the light between the eye and the body; the 3rd | ||||
the body between the eye and the light, _a_ is the eye, _b_ the | ||||
illuminated object, _c_ the light. | ||||
117. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
OF THE THREE KINDS OF LIGHT THAT ILLUMINATE OPAQUE BODIES. | ||||
The first kind of Light which may illuminate opaque bodies is called | ||||
Direct light--as that of the sun or any other light from a window or | ||||
flame. The second is Diffused [universal] light, such as we see in | ||||
cloudy weather or in mist and the like. The 3rd is Subdued light, | ||||
that is when the sun is entirely below the horizon, either in the | ||||
evening or morning. | ||||
118. | ||||
OF LIGHT. | ||||
The lights which may illuminate opaque bodies are of 4 kinds. These | ||||
are: diffused light as that of the atmosphere, within our horizon. | ||||
And Direct, as that of the sun, or of a window or door or other | ||||
opening. The third is Reflected light; and there is a 4th which is | ||||
that which passes through [semi] transparent bodies, as linen or | ||||
paper or the like, but not transparent like glass, or crystal, or | ||||
other diaphanous bodies, which produce the same effect as though | ||||
nothing intervened between the shaded object and the light that | ||||
falls upon it; and this we will discuss fully in our discourse. | ||||
Definition of the nature of shadows (119--122). | ||||
119. | ||||
WHAT LIGHT AND SHADOW ARE. | ||||
Shadow is the absence of light, merely the obstruction of the | ||||
luminous rays by an opaque body. Shadow is of the nature of | ||||
darkness. Light [on an object] is of the nature of a luminous body; | ||||
one conceals and the other reveals. They are always associated and | ||||
inseparable from all objects. But shadow is a more powerful agent | ||||
than light, for it can impede and entirely deprive bodies of their | ||||
light, while light can never entirely expel shadow from a body, that | ||||
is from an opaque body. | ||||
120. | ||||
Shadow is the diminution of light by the intervention of an opaque | ||||
body. Shadow is the counterpart of the luminous rays which are cut | ||||
off by an opaque body. | ||||
This is proved because the shadow cast is the same in shape and size | ||||
as the luminous rays were which are transformed into a shadow. | ||||
121. | ||||
Shadow is the diminution alike of light and of darkness, and stands | ||||
between darkness and light. | ||||
A shadow may be infinitely dark, and also of infinite degrees of | ||||
absence of darkness. | ||||
The beginnings and ends of shadow lie between the light and darkness | ||||
and may be infinitely diminished and infinitely increased. Shadow is | ||||
the means by which bodies display their form. | ||||
The forms of bodies could not be understood in detail but for | ||||
shadow. | ||||
122. | ||||
OF THE NATURE OF SHADOW. | ||||
Shadow partakes of the nature of universal matter. All such matters | ||||
are more powerful in their beginning and grow weaker towards the | ||||
end, I say at the beginning, whatever their form or condition may be | ||||
and whether visible or invisible. And it is not from small | ||||
beginnings that they grow to a great size in time; as it might be a | ||||
great oak which has a feeble beginning from a small acorn. Yet I may | ||||
say that the oak is most powerful at its beginning, that is where it | ||||
springs from the earth, which is where it is largest (To return:) | ||||
Darkness, then, is the strongest degree of shadow and light is its | ||||
least. Therefore, O Painter, make your shadow darkest close to the | ||||
object that casts it, and make the end of it fading into light, | ||||
seeming to have no end. | ||||
Of the various kinds of shadows. (123-125). | ||||
123. | ||||
Darkness is absence of light. Shadow is diminution of light. | ||||
Primitive shadow is that which is inseparable from a body not in the | ||||
light. Derived shadow is that which is disengaged from a body in | ||||
shadow and pervades the air. A cast transparent shadow is that which | ||||
is surrounded by an illuminated surface. A simple shadow is one | ||||
which receives no light from the luminous body which causes it. A | ||||
simple shadow begins within the line which starts from the edge of | ||||
the luminous body _a b_. | ||||
124. | ||||
A simple shadow is one where no light at all interferes with it. | ||||
A compound shadow is one which is somewhat illuminated by one or | ||||
more lights. | ||||
125. | ||||
WHAT IS THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN A SHADOW THAT IS INSEPARABLE FROM A | ||||
BODY AND A CAST SHADOW? | ||||
An inseparable shadow is that which is never absent from the | ||||
illuminated body. As, for instance a ball, which so long as it is in | ||||
the light always has one side in shadow which never leaves it for | ||||
any movement or change of position in the ball. A separate shadow | ||||
may be and may not be produced by the body itself. Suppose the ball | ||||
to be one braccia distant from a wall with a light on the opposite | ||||
side of it; this light will throw upon the wall exactly as broad a | ||||
shadow as is to be seen on the side of the ball that is turned | ||||
towards the wall. That portion of the cast shadow will not be | ||||
visible when the light is below the ball and the shadow is thrown up | ||||
towards the sky and finding no obstruction on its way is lost. | ||||
126. | ||||
HOW THERE ARE 2 KINDS OF LIGHT, ONE SEPARABLE FROM, AND THE OTHER | ||||
INSEPARABLE FROM BODIES. | ||||
Of the various kinds of light (126, 127). | ||||
Separate light is that which falls upon the body. Inseparable light | ||||
is the side of the body that is illuminated by that light. One is | ||||
called primary, the other derived. And, in the same way there are | ||||
two kinds of shadow:--One primary and the other derived. The primary | ||||
is that which is inseparable from the body, the derived is that | ||||
which proceeds from the body conveying to the surface of the wall | ||||
the form of the body causing it. | ||||
127. | ||||
How there are 2 different kinds of light; one being called diffused, | ||||
the other restricted. The diffused is that which freely illuminates | ||||
objects. The restricted is that which being admitted through an | ||||
opening or window illuminates them on that side only. | ||||
[Footnote: At the spot marked _A_ in the first diagram Leonardo | ||||
wrote _lume costretto_ (restricted light). At the spot _B_ on the | ||||
second diagram he wrote _lume libero_ (diffused light).] | ||||
General remarks (128. 129). | ||||
128. | ||||
Light is the chaser away of darkness. Shade is the obstruction of | ||||
light. Primary light is that which falls on objects and causes light | ||||
and shade. And derived lights are those portions of a body which are | ||||
illuminated by the primary light. A primary shadow is that side of a | ||||
body on which the light cannot fall. | ||||
The general distribution of shadow and light is that sum total of | ||||
the rays thrown off by a shaded or illuminated body passing through | ||||
the air without any interference and the spot which intercepts and | ||||
cuts off the distribution of the dark and light rays. | ||||
And the eye can best distinguish the forms of objects when it is | ||||
placed between the shaded and the illuminated parts. | ||||
129. | ||||
MEMORANDUM OF THINGS I REQUIRE TO HAVE GRANTED [AS AXIOMS] IN MY | ||||
EXPLANATION OF PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
I ask to have this much granted me--to assert that every ray | ||||
passing through air of equal density throughout, travels in a | ||||
straight line from its cause to the object or place it falls upon. | ||||
FIRST BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE. | ||||
On the nature of light (130. 131). | ||||
130. | ||||
The reason by which we know that a light radiates from a single | ||||
centre is this: We plainly see that a large light is often much | ||||
broader than some small object which nevertheless--and although the | ||||
rays [of the large light] are much more than twice the extent [of | ||||
the small body]--always has its shadow cast on the nearest surface | ||||
very visibly. Let _c f_ be a broad light and _n_ be the object in | ||||
front of it, casting a shadow on the plane, and let _a b_ be the | ||||
plane. It is clear that it is not the broad light that will cast the | ||||
shadow _n_ on the plane, but that the light has within it a centre | ||||
is shown by this experiment. The shadow falls on the plane as is | ||||
shown at _m o t r_. | ||||
[Footnote 13: In the original MS. no explanatory text is placed | ||||
after this title-line; but a space is left for it and the text | ||||
beginning at line 15 comes next.] Why, to two [eyes] or in front of | ||||
two eyes do 3 objects appear as two? | ||||
Why, when you estimate the direction of an object with two sights | ||||
the nearer appears confused. I say that the eye projects an infinite | ||||
number of lines which mingle or join those reaching it which come to | ||||
it from the object looked at. And it is only the central and | ||||
sensible line that can discern and discriminate colours and objects; | ||||
all the others are false and illusory. And if you place 2 objects at | ||||
half an arm's length apart if the nearer of the two is close to the | ||||
eye its form will remain far more confused than that of the second; | ||||
the reason is that the first is overcome by a greater number of | ||||
false lines than the second and so is rendered vague. | ||||
Light acts in the same manner, for in the effects of its lines | ||||
(=rays), and particularly in perspective, it much resembles the eye; | ||||
and its central rays are what cast the true shadow. When the object | ||||
in front of it is too quickly overcome with dim rays it will cast a | ||||
broad and disproportionate shadow, ill defined; but when the object | ||||
which is to cast the shadow and cuts off the rays near to the place | ||||
where the shadow falls, then the shadow is distinct; and the more so | ||||
in proportion as the light is far off, because at a long distance | ||||
the central ray is less overcome by false rays; because the lines | ||||
from the eye and the solar and other luminous rays passing through | ||||
the atmosphere are obliged to travel in straight lines. Unless they | ||||
are deflected by a denser or rarer air, when they will be bent at | ||||
some point, but so long as the air is free from grossness or | ||||
moisture they will preserve their direct course, always carrying the | ||||
image of the object that intercepts them back to their point of | ||||
origin. And if this is the eye, the intercepting object will be seen | ||||
by its colour, as well as by form and size. But if the intercepting | ||||
plane has in it some small perforation opening into a darker | ||||
chamber--not darker in colour, but by absence of light--you will see | ||||
the rays enter through this hole and transmitting to the plane | ||||
beyond all the details of the object they proceed from both as to | ||||
colour and form; only every thing will be upside down. But the size | ||||
[of the image] where the lines are reconstructed will be in | ||||
proportion to the relative distance of the aperture from the plane | ||||
on which the lines fall [on one hand] and from their origin [on the | ||||
other]. There they intersect and form 2 pyramids with their point | ||||
meeting [a common apex] and their bases opposite. Let _a b_ be the | ||||
point of origin of the lines, _d e_ the first plane, and _c_ the | ||||
aperture with the intersection of the lines; _f g_ is the inner | ||||
plane. You will find that _a_ falls upon the inner plane below at | ||||
_g_, and _b_ which is below will go up to the spot _f_; it will be | ||||
quite evident to experimenters that every luminous body has in | ||||
itself a core or centre, from which and to which all the lines | ||||
radiate which are sent forth by the surface of the luminous body and | ||||
reflected back to it; or which, having been thrown out and not | ||||
intercepted, are dispersed in the air. | ||||
131. | ||||
THE RAYS WHETHER SHADED OR LUMINOUS HAVE GREATER STRENGTH AND EFFECT | ||||
AT THEIR POINTS THAN AT THEIR SIDES. | ||||
Although the points of luminous pyramids may extend into shaded | ||||
places and those of pyramids of shadow into illuminated places, and | ||||
though among the luminous pyramids one may start from a broader base | ||||
than another; nevertheless, if by reason of their various length | ||||
these luminous pyramids acquire angles of equal size their light | ||||
will be equal; and the case will be the same with the pyramids of | ||||
shadow; as may be seen in the intersected pyramids _a b c_ and _d e | ||||
f_, which though their bases differ in size are equal as to breadth | ||||
and light. | ||||
[Footnote: 51--55: This supplementary paragraph is indicated as being | ||||
a continuation of line 45, by two small crosses.] | ||||
The difference between light and lustre (132--135). | ||||
132. | ||||
Of the difference between light and lustre; and that lustre is not | ||||
included among colours, but is saturation of whiteness, and derived | ||||
from the surface of wet bodies; light partakes of the colour of the | ||||
object which reflects it (to the eye) as gold or silver or the like. | ||||
133. | ||||
OF THE HIGHEST LIGHTS WHICH TURN AND MOVE AS THE EYE MOVES WHICH | ||||
SEES THE OBJECT. | ||||
Suppose the body to be the round object figured here and let the | ||||
light be at the point _a_, and let the illuminated side of the | ||||
object be _b c_ and the eye at the point _d_: I say that, as lustre | ||||
is every where and complete in each part, if you stand at the point | ||||
_d_ the lustre will appear at _c_, and in proportion as the eye | ||||
moves from _d_ to _a_, the lustre will move from _c_ to _n_. | ||||
134. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
Heigh light or lustre on any object is not situated [necessarily] in | ||||
the middle of an illuminated object, but moves as and where the eye | ||||
moves in looking at it. | ||||
135. | ||||
OF LIGHT AND LUSTRE. | ||||
What is the difference between light and the lustre which is seen on | ||||
the polished surface of opaque bodies? | ||||
The lights which are produced from the polished surface of opaque | ||||
bodies will be stationary on stationary objects even if the eye on | ||||
which they strike moves. But reflected lights will, on those same | ||||
objects, appear in as many different places on the surface as | ||||
different positions are taken by the eye. | ||||
WHAT BODIES HAVE LIGHT UPON THEM WITHOUT LUSTRE? | ||||
Opaque bodies which have a hard and rough surface never display any | ||||
lustre in any portion of the side on which the light falls. | ||||
WHAT BODIES WILL DISPLAY LUSTRE BUT NOT LOOK ILLUMINATED? | ||||
Those bodies which are opaque and hard with a hard surface reflect | ||||
light [lustre] from every spot on the illuminated side which is in a | ||||
position to receive light at the same angle of incidence as they | ||||
occupy with regard to the eye; but, as the surface mirrors all the | ||||
surrounding objects, the illuminated [body] is not recognisable in | ||||
these portions of the illuminated body. | ||||
136. | ||||
The relations of luminous to illuminated bodies. | ||||
The middle of the light and shade on an object in light and shade is | ||||
opposite to the middle of the primary light. All light and shadow | ||||
expresses itself in pyramidal lines. The middle of the shadow on any | ||||
object must necessarily be opposite the middle of its light, with a | ||||
direct line passing through the centre of the body. The middle of | ||||
the light will be at _a_, that of the shadow at _b_. [Again, in | ||||
bodies shown in light and shade the middle of each must coincide | ||||
with the centre of the body, and a straight line will pass through | ||||
both and through that centre.] | ||||
[Footnote: In the original MS., at the spot marked _a_ of the first | ||||
diagram Leonardo wrote _primitiuo_, and at the spot marked | ||||
_c_--_primitiva_ (primary); at the spot marked _b_ he wrote | ||||
_dirivatiuo_ and at _d deriuatiua_ (derived).] | ||||
Experiments on the relation of light and shadow within a room | ||||
(137--140). | ||||
137. | ||||
SHOWS HOW LIGHT FROM ANY SIDE CONVERGES TO ONE POINT. | ||||
Although the balls _a b c_ are lighted from one window, | ||||
nevertheless, if you follow the lines of their shadows you will see | ||||
they intersect at a point forming the angle _n_. | ||||
[Footnote: The diagram belonging to this passage is slightly | ||||
sketched on Pl. XXXII; a square with three balls below it. The first | ||||
three lines of the text belonging to it are written above the sketch | ||||
and the six others below it.] | ||||
138. | ||||
Every shadow cast by a body has a central line directed to a single | ||||
point produced by the intersection of luminous lines in the middle | ||||
of the opening and thickness of the window. The proposition stated | ||||
above, is plainly seen by experiment. Thus if you draw a place with | ||||
a window looking northwards, and let this be _s f_, you will see a | ||||
line starting from the horizon to the east, which, touching the 2 | ||||
angles of the window _o f_, reaches _d_; and from the horizon on the | ||||
west another line, touching the other 2 angles _r s_, and ending at | ||||
_c_; and their intersection falls exactly in the middle of the | ||||
opening and thickness of the window. Again, you can still better | ||||
confirm this proof by placing two sticks, as shown at _g h_; and you | ||||
will see the line drawn from the centre of the shadow directed to | ||||
the centre _m_ and prolonged to the horizon _n f_. | ||||
[Footnote: _B_ here stands for _cerchio del' orizonte tramontano_ on | ||||
the original diagram (the circle of the horizon towards the North); | ||||
_A_ for _levante_ (East) and _C_ for _ponete_ (West).] | ||||
139. | ||||
Every shadow with all its variations, which becomes larger as its | ||||
distance from the object is greater, has its external lines | ||||
intersecting in the middle, between the light and the object. This | ||||
proposition is very evident and is confirmed by experience. For, if | ||||
_a b_ is a window without any object interposed, the luminous | ||||
atmosphere to the right hand at _a_ is seen to the left at _d_. And | ||||
the atmosphere at the left illuminates on the right at _c_, and the | ||||
lines intersect at the point _m_. | ||||
[Footnote: _A_ here stands for _levante_ (East), _B_ for _ponente_ | ||||
(West).] | ||||
140. | ||||
Every body in light and shade is situated between 2 pyramids one | ||||
dark and the other luminous, one is visible the other is not. But | ||||
this only happens when the light enters by a window. Supposing _a b_ | ||||
to be the window and _r_ the body in light and shade, the light to | ||||
the right hand _z_ will pass the object to the left and go on to | ||||
_p_; the light to the left at _k_ will pass to the right of the | ||||
object at _i_ and go on to _m_ and the two lines will intersect at | ||||
_c_ and form a pyramid. Then again _a_ _b_ falls on the shaded body | ||||
at _i_ _g_ and forms a pyramid _f_ _i_ _g_. _f_ will be dark because | ||||
the light _a_ _b_ can never fall there; _i_ _g_ _c_ will be | ||||
illuminated because the light falls upon it. | ||||
Light and shadow with regard to the position of the eye (141--145). | ||||
141. | ||||
Every shaded body that is larger than the pupil and that interposes | ||||
between the luminous body and the eye will be seen dark. | ||||
When the eye is placed between the luminous body and the objects | ||||
illuminated by it, these objects will be seen without any shadow. | ||||
[Footnote: The diagram which in the original stands above line 1 is | ||||
given on Plate II, No 2. Then, after a blank space of about eight | ||||
lines, the diagram Plate II No 3 is placed in the original. There is | ||||
no explanation of it beyond the one line written under it.] | ||||
142. | ||||
Why the 2 lights one on each side of a body having two pyramidal | ||||
sides of an obtuse apex leave it devoid of shadow. | ||||
[Footnote: The sketch illustrating this is on Plate XLI No 1.] | ||||
143. | ||||
A body in shadow situated between the light and the eye can never | ||||
display its illuminated portion unless the eye can see the whole of | ||||
the primary light. | ||||
[Footnote: _A_ stands for _corpo_ (body), _B_ for _lume_ (light).] | ||||
144. | ||||
The eye which looks (at a spot) half way between the shadow and the | ||||
light which surrounds the body in shadow will see that the deepest | ||||
shadows on that body will meet the eye at equal angles, that is at | ||||
the same angle as that of sight. | ||||
[Footnote: In both these diagrams _A_ stands for _lume_ (light) _B_ | ||||
for _ombra_ (shadow).] | ||||
145. | ||||
OF THE DIFFERENT LIGHT AND SHADE IN VARIOUS ASPECTS AND OF OBJECTS | ||||
PLACED IN THEM. | ||||
If the sun is in the East and you look towards the West you will see | ||||
every thing in full light and totally without shadow because you see | ||||
them from the same side as the sun: and if you look towards the | ||||
South or North you will see all objects in light and shade, because | ||||
you see both the side towards the sun and the side away from it; and | ||||
if you look towards the coming of the sun all objects will show you | ||||
their shaded side, because on that side the sun cannot fall upon | ||||
them. | ||||
The law of the incidence of light. | ||||
146. | ||||
The edges of a window which are illuminated by 2 lights of equal | ||||
degrees of brightness will not reflect light of equal brightness | ||||
into the chamber within. | ||||
If _b_ is a candle and _a c_ our hemisphere both will illuminate the | ||||
edges of the window _m_ _n_, but light _b_ will only illuminate _f | ||||
g_ and the hemisphere _a_ will light all of _d e_. | ||||
147. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
That part of a body which receives the luminous rays at equal angles | ||||
will be in a higher light than any other part of it. | ||||
And the part which the luminous rays strike between less equal | ||||
angles will be less strongly illuminated. | ||||
SECOND BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE. | ||||
Gradations of strength in the shadows (148. 149). | ||||
148. | ||||
THAT PORTION OF A BODY IN LIGHT AND SHADE WILL BE LEAST LUMINOUS | ||||
WHICH IS SEEN UNDER THE LEAST AMOUNT OF LIGHT. | ||||
That part of the object which is marked _m_ is in the highest light | ||||
because it faces the window _a d_ by the line _a f_; _n_ is in the | ||||
second grade because the light _b d_ strikes it by the line _b e_; | ||||
_o_ is in the third grade, as the light falls on it from _c d_ by | ||||
the line _c h_; _p_ is the lowest light but one as _c d_ falls on it | ||||
by the line _d v_; _q_ is the deepest shadow for no light falls on | ||||
it from any part of the window. | ||||
In proportion as _c d_ goes into _a d_ so will _n r s_ be darker | ||||
than _m_, and all the rest is space without shadow. | ||||
[Footnote: The diagram belonging to this chapter is No. 1 on Plate | ||||
III. The letters _a b e d_ and _r_ are not reproduced in facsimile | ||||
of the original, but have been replaced by ordinary type in the | ||||
margin. 5-12. The original text of these lines is reproduced within | ||||
the diagram.--Compare No 275.] | ||||
149. | ||||
The light which falls on a shaded body at the acutest angle receives | ||||
the highest light, and the darkest portion is that which receives it | ||||
at an obtuse angle and both the light and the shadow form pyramids. | ||||
The angle _c_ receives the highest grade of light because it is | ||||
directly in front of the window _a b_ and the whole horizon of the | ||||
sky _m x_. The angle _a_ differs but little from _c_ because the | ||||
angles which divide it are not so unequal as those below, and only | ||||
that portion of the horizon is intercepted which lies between _y_ | ||||
and _x_. Although it gains as much on the other side its line is | ||||
nevertheless not very strong because one angle is smaller than its | ||||
fellow. The angles _e i_ will have less light because they do not | ||||
see much of the light _m s_ and the light _v x_ and their angles are | ||||
very unequal. Yhe angle _k_ and the angle _f_ are each placed | ||||
between very unequal angles and therefore have but little light, | ||||
because at _k_ it has only the light _p t_, and at _f_ only _t q_; | ||||
_o g_ is the lowest grade of light because this part has no light at | ||||
all from the sky; and thence come the lines which will reconstruct a | ||||
pyramid that is the counterpart of the pyramid _c_; and this pyramid | ||||
_l_ is in the first grade of shadow; for this too is placed between | ||||
equal angles directly opposite to each other on either side of a | ||||
straight line which passes through the centre of the body and goes | ||||
to the centre of the light. The several luminous images cast within | ||||
the frame of the window at the points _a_ and _b_ make a light which | ||||
surrounds the derived shadow cast by the solid body at the points 4 | ||||
and 6. The shaded images increase from _o g_ and end at 7 and 8. | ||||
[Footnote: The diagram belonging to this chapter is No. 2 on Plate | ||||
III. In the original it is placed between lines 3 and 4, and in the | ||||
reproduction these are shown in part. The semi circle above is | ||||
marked _orizonte_ (horizon). The number 6 at the left hand side, | ||||
outside the facsimile, is in the place of a figure which has become | ||||
indistinct in the original.] | ||||
On the intensity of shadows as dependent on the distance from the | ||||
light (150-152). | ||||
150. | ||||
The smaller the light that falls upon an object the more shadow it | ||||
will display. And the light will illuminate a smaller portion of the | ||||
object in proportion as it is nearer to it; and conversely, a larger | ||||
extent of it in proportion as it is farther off. | ||||
A light which is smaller than the object on which it falls will | ||||
light up a smaller extent of it in proportion as it is nearer to it, | ||||
and the converse, as it is farther from it. But when the light is | ||||
larger than the object illuminated it will light a larger extent of | ||||
the object in proportion as it is nearer and the converse when they | ||||
are farther apart. | ||||
151. | ||||
That portion of an illuminated object which is nearest to the source | ||||
of light will be the most strongly illuminated. | ||||
152. | ||||
That portion of the primary shadow will be least dark which is | ||||
farthest from the edges. | ||||
The derived shadow will be darker than the primary shadow where it | ||||
is contiguous with it. | ||||
On the proportion of light and shade (153-157). | ||||
153. | ||||
That portion of an opaque body will be more in shade or more in | ||||
light, which is nearer to the dark body, by which it is shaded, or | ||||
to the light that illuminates it. | ||||
Objects seen in light and shade show in greater relief than those | ||||
which are wholly in light or in shadow. | ||||
154. | ||||
OF PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
The shaded and illuminated sides of opaque objects will display the | ||||
same proportion of light and darkness as their objects [Footnote 6: | ||||
The meaning of _obbietti_ (objects) is explained in no 153, lines | ||||
1-4.--Between the title-line and the next there is, in the | ||||
original, a small diagram representing a circle described round a | ||||
square.]. | ||||
155. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
The outlines and form of any part of a body in light and shade are | ||||
indistinct in the shadows and in the high lights; but in the | ||||
portions between the light and the shadows they are highly | ||||
conspicuous. | ||||
156. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
Among objects in various degrees of shade, when the light proceeds | ||||
from a single source, there will be the same proportion in their | ||||
shadows as in the natural diminution of the light and the same must | ||||
be understood of the degrees of light. | ||||
157. | ||||
A single and distinct luminous body causes stronger relief in the | ||||
object than a diffused light; as may be seen by comparing one side | ||||
of a landscape illuminated by the sun, and one overshadowed by | ||||
clouds, and so illuminated only by the diffused light of the | ||||
atmosphere. | ||||
THIRD BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE. | ||||
Definition of derived shadow (158. 159). | ||||
158. | ||||
Derived shadow cannot exist without primary shadow. This is proved | ||||
by the first of this which says: Darkness is the total absence of | ||||
light, and shadow is an alleviation of darkness and of light, and it | ||||
is more or less dark or light in proportion as the darkness is | ||||
modified by the light. | ||||
159. | ||||
Shadow is diminution of light. | ||||
Darkness is absence of light. | ||||
Shadow is divided into two kinds, of which the first is called | ||||
primary shadow, the second is derived shadow. The primary shadow is | ||||
always the basis of the derived shadow. | ||||
The edges of the derived shadow are straight lines. | ||||
[Footnote: The theory of the _ombra_ dirivativa_--a technical | ||||
expression for which there is no precise English equivalent is | ||||
elaborately treated by Leonardo. But both text and diagrams (as Pl. | ||||
IV, 1-3 and Pl. V) must at once convince the student that the | ||||
distinction he makes between _ombra primitiva_ and _ombra | ||||
dirivativa_ is not merely justifiable but scientific. _Ombra | ||||
dirivativa_ is by no means a mere abstract idea. This is easily | ||||
proved by repeating the experiment made by Leonardo, and by filling | ||||
with smoke the room in which the existence of the _ombra dirivativa_ | ||||
is investigated, when the shadow becomes visible. Nor is it | ||||
difficult to perceive how much of Leonardo's teaching depended on | ||||
this theory. The recognised, but extremely complicated science of | ||||
cast shadows--_percussione dell' ombre dirivative_ as Leonardo | ||||
calls them--is thus rendered more intelligible if not actually | ||||
simpler, and we must assume this theory as our chief guide through | ||||
the investigations which follow.] | ||||
The darkness of the derived shadow diminishes in proportion as it is | ||||
remote from the primary shadow. | ||||
Different sorts of derived shadows (160-162). | ||||
160. | ||||
SHADOW AND LIGHT. | ||||
The forms of shadows are three: inasmuch as if the solid body which | ||||
casts the shadow is equal (in size) to the light, the shadow | ||||
resembles a column without any termination (in length). If the body | ||||
is larger than the light the shadow resembles a truncated and | ||||
inverted pyramid, and its length has also no defined termination. | ||||
But if the body is smaller than the light, the shadow will resemble | ||||
a pyramid and come to an end, as is seen in eclipses of the moon. | ||||
161. | ||||
OF SIMPLE DERIVED SHADOWS. | ||||
The simple derived shadow is of two kinds: one kind which has its | ||||
length defined, and two kinds which are undefined; and the defined | ||||
shadow is pyramidal. Of the two undefined, one is a column and the | ||||
other spreads out; and all three have rectilinear outlines. But the | ||||
converging, that is the pyramidal, shadow proceeds from a body that | ||||
is smaller than the light, and the columnar from a body equal in | ||||
size to the light, and the spreading shadow from a body larger than | ||||
the light; &c. | ||||
OF COMPOUND DERIVED SHADOWS. | ||||
Compound derived shadows are of two kinds; that is columnar and | ||||
spreading. | ||||
162. | ||||
OF SHADOW. | ||||
Derived shadows are of three kinds of which one is spreading, the | ||||
second columnar, the third converging to the point where the two | ||||
sides meet and intersect, and beyond this intersection the sides are | ||||
infinitely prolonged or straight lines. And if you say, this shadow | ||||
must terminate at the angle where the sides meet and extend no | ||||
farther, I deny this, because above in the first on shadow I have | ||||
proved: that a thing is completely terminated when no portion of it | ||||
goes beyond its terminating lines. Now here, in this shadow, we see | ||||
the converse of this, in as much as where this derived shadow | ||||
originates we obviously have the figures of two pyramids of shadow | ||||
which meet at their angles. Hence, if, as [my] opponent says, the | ||||
first pyramid of shadow terminates the derivative shadow at the | ||||
angle whence it starts, then the second pyramid of shadow--so says | ||||
the adversary--must be caused by the angle and not from the body in | ||||
shadow; and this is disproved with the help of the 2nd of this which | ||||
says: Shadow is a condition produced by a body casting a shadow, and | ||||
interposed between this shadow and the luminous body. By this it is | ||||
made clear that the shadow is not produced by the angle of the | ||||
derived shadow but only by the body casting the shadow; &c. If a | ||||
spherical solid body is illuminated by a light of elongated form the | ||||
shadow produced by the longest portion of this light will have less | ||||
defined outlines than that which is produced by the breadth of the | ||||
same light. And this is proved by what was said before, which is: | ||||
That a shadow will have less defined outlines in proportion as the | ||||
light which causes it is larger, and conversely, the outlines are | ||||
clearer in proportion as it is smaller. | ||||
[Footnote: The two diagrams to this chapter are on Plate IV, No. 1.] | ||||
On the relation of derived and primary shadow (163-165). | ||||
163. | ||||
The derived shadow can never resemble the body from which it | ||||
proceeds unless the light is of the same form and size as the body | ||||
causing the shadow. | ||||
The derived shadow cannot be of the same form as the primary shadow | ||||
unless it is intercepted by a plane parallel to it. | ||||
164. | ||||
HOW A CAST SHADOW CAN NEVER BE OF THE SAME SIZE AS THE BODY THAT | ||||
CASTS IT. | ||||
If the rays of light proceed, as experience shows, from a single | ||||
point and are diffused in a sphere round this point, radiating and | ||||
dispersed through the air, the farther they spread the wider they | ||||
must spread; and an object placed between the light and a wall is | ||||
always imaged larger in its shadow, because the rays that strike it | ||||
[Footnote: 7. The following lines are wanting to complete the | ||||
logical connection.] would, by the time they have reached the wall, | ||||
have become larger. | ||||
165. | ||||
Any shadow cast by a body in light and shade is of the same nature | ||||
and character as that which is inseparable from the body. The centre | ||||
of the length of a shadow always corresponds to that of the luminous | ||||
body [Footnote 6: This second statement of the same idea as in the | ||||
former sentence, but in different words, does not, in the original, | ||||
come next to the foregoing; sections 172 and 127 are placed between | ||||
them.]. It is inevitable that every shadow must have its centre in a | ||||
line with the centre of the light. | ||||
On the shape of derived shadows (166-174). | ||||
166. | ||||
OF THE PYRAMIDAL SHADOW. | ||||
The pyramidal shadow produced by a columnar body will be narrower | ||||
than the body itself in proportion as the simple derived shadow is | ||||
intersected farther from the body which casts it. | ||||
[Footnote 166: Compare the first diagram to No. 161. If we here | ||||
conceive of the outlines of the pyramid of shadow on the ground as | ||||
prolonged beyond its apex this gives rise to a second pyramid; this | ||||
is what is spoken of at the beginning of No. 166.] | ||||
167. | ||||
The cast shadow will be longest when the light is lowest. | ||||
The cast shadow will be shortest when the light is highest. | ||||
168. | ||||
Both the primary and derived shadow will be larger when caused by | ||||
the light of a candle than by diffused light. The difference between | ||||
the larger and smaller shadows will be in inverse proportion to the | ||||
larger and smaller lights causing them. | ||||
[Footnote: In the diagrams _A_ stands for _celo_ (sky), _B_ for | ||||
_cadela_ (candle).] | ||||
169. | ||||
ALL BODIES, IN PROPORTION AS THEY ARE NEARER TO, OR FARTHER FROM THE | ||||
SOURCE OF LIGHT, WILL PRODUCE LONGER OR SHORTER DERIVED SHADOWS. | ||||
Among bodies of equal size, that one which is illuminated by the | ||||
largest light will have the shortest shadow. Experiment confirms | ||||
this proposition. Thus the body _m_ _n_ is surrounded by a larger | ||||
amount of light than the body _p q_, as is shown above. Let us say | ||||
that _v c a b d x_ is the sky, the source of light, and that _s t_ | ||||
is a window by which the luminous rays enter, and so _m n_ and _p q_ | ||||
are bodies in light and shade as exposed to this light; _m n_ will | ||||
have a small derived shadow, because its original shadow will be | ||||
small; and the derivative light will be large, again, because the | ||||
original light _c d_ will be large and _p q_ will have more derived | ||||
shadow because its original shadow will be larger, and its derived | ||||
light will be smaller than that of the body _m n_ because that | ||||
portion of the hemisphere _a b_ which illuminates it is smaller than | ||||
the hemisphere _c d_ which illuminates the body _m n_. | ||||
[Footnote: The diagram, given on Pl. IV, No. 2, stands in the | ||||
original between lines 2 and 7, while the text of lines 3 to 6 is | ||||
written on its left side. In the reproduction of this diagram the | ||||
letter _v_ at the outer right-hand end has been omitted.] | ||||
170. | ||||
The shadow _m_ bears the same proportion to the shadow _n_ as the | ||||
line _b c_ to the line _f c_. | ||||
171. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
Of different shadows of equal strength that which is nearest the eye | ||||
will seem the least strong. | ||||
Why is the shadow _e a b_ in the first grade of strength, _b c_ in | ||||
the second; _c d_ in the third? The reason is that as from _e a b_ | ||||
the sky is nowhere visible, it gets no light whatever from the sky, | ||||
and so has no direct [primary] light. _b c_ faces the portion of the | ||||
sky _f g_ and is illuminated by it. _c d_ faces the sky at _h k_. _c | ||||
d_, being exposed to a larger extent of sky than _b c_, it is | ||||
reasonable that it should be more lighted. And thus, up to a certain | ||||
distance, the wall _a d_ will grow lighter for the reasons here | ||||
given, until the darkness of the room overpowers the light from the | ||||
window. | ||||
172. | ||||
When the light of the atmosphere is restricted [by an opening] and | ||||
illuminates bodies which cast shadows, these bodies being equally | ||||
distant from the centre of the window, that which is most obliquely | ||||
placed will cast the largest shadow beyond it. | ||||
173. | ||||
These bodies standing apart in a room lighted by a single window | ||||
will have derivative shadows more or less short according as they | ||||
are more or less opposite to the window. Among the shadows cast by | ||||
bodies of equal mass but at unequal distances from the opening by | ||||
which they are illuminated, that shadow will be the longest of the | ||||
body which is least in the light. And in proportion as one body is | ||||
better illuminated than another its shadow will be shorter than | ||||
another. The proportion _n m_ and _e v k_ bear to _r t_ and _v x_ | ||||
corresponds with that of the shadow _x_ to 4 and _y_. | ||||
The reason why those bodies which are placed most in front of the | ||||
middle of the window throw shorter shadows than those obliquely | ||||
situated is:--That the window appears in its proper form and to the | ||||
obliquely placed ones it appears foreshortened; to those in the | ||||
middle, the window shows its full size, to the oblique ones it | ||||
appears smaller; the one in the middle faces the whole hemisphere | ||||
that is _e f_ and those on the side have only a strip; that is _q r_ | ||||
faces _a b_; and _m n_ faces _c d_; the body in the middle having a | ||||
larger quantity of light than those at the sides is lighted from a | ||||
point much below its centre, and thus the shadow is shorter. And the | ||||
pyramid _g_ 4 goes into _l y_ exactly as often as _a b_ goes into _e | ||||
f_. The axis of every derivative shadow passes through 6 1/2 | ||||
[Footnote 31: _passa per_ 6 1/2 (passes through 6 1/2). The meaning | ||||
of these words is probably this: Each of the three axes of the | ||||
derived shadow intersects the centre (_mezzo_) of the primary shadow | ||||
(_ombra originale_) and, by prolongation upwards crosses six lines. | ||||
This is self evident only in the middle diagram; but it is equally | ||||
true of the side figures if we conceive of the lines 4 _f_, _x n v | ||||
m_, _y l k v_, and 4 _e_, as prolonged beyond the semicircle of the | ||||
horizon.] and is in a straight line with the centre of the primary | ||||
shadow, with the centre of the body casting it and of the derivative | ||||
light and with the centre of the window and, finally, with the | ||||
centre of that portion of the source of light which is the celestial | ||||
hemisphere, _y h_ is the centre of the derived shade, _l h_ of the | ||||
primary shadow, _l_ of the body throwing it, _l k_ of the derived | ||||
light, _v_ is the centre of the window, _e_ is the final centre of | ||||
the original light afforded by that portion of the hemisphere of the | ||||
sky which illuminates the solid body. | ||||
[Footnote: Compare the diagram on Pl. IV, No. 3. In the original | ||||
this drawing is placed between lines 3 and 22; the rest, from line 4 | ||||
to line 21, is written on the left hand margin.] | ||||
174. | ||||
THE FARTHER THE DERIVED SHADOW IS PROLONGED THE LIGHTER IT BECOMES. | ||||
You will find that the proportion of the diameter of the derived | ||||
shadow to that of the primary shadow will be the same as that | ||||
between the darkness of the primary shadow and that of the derived | ||||
shadow. | ||||
[Footnote 6: Compare No. 177.] Let _a b_ be the diameter of the | ||||
primary shadow and _c d_ that of the derived shadow, I say that _a | ||||
b_ going, as you see, three times into _d c_, the shadow _d c_ will | ||||
be three times as light as the shadow _a b_. [Footnote 8: Compare | ||||
No. 177.] | ||||
If the size of the illuminating body is larger than that of the | ||||
illuminated body an intersection of shadow will occur, beyond which | ||||
the shadows will run off in two opposite directions as if they were | ||||
caused by two separate lights. | ||||
On the relative intensity of derived shadows (175-179). | ||||
175. | ||||
ON PAINTING. | ||||
The derived shadow is stronger in proportion as it is nearer to its | ||||
place of origin. | ||||
176. | ||||
HOW SHADOWS FADE AWAY AT LONG DISTANCES. | ||||
Shadows fade and are lost at long distances because the larger | ||||
quantity of illuminated air which lies between the eye and the | ||||
object seen tints the shadow with its own colour. | ||||
177. | ||||
_a b_ will be darker than _c d_ in proportion as _c d_ is broader | ||||
than _a b_. | ||||
[Footnote: In the original MS. the word _lume_ (light) is written at | ||||
the apex of the pyramid.] | ||||
178. | ||||
It can be proved why the shadow _o p c h_ is darker in proportion as | ||||
it is nearer to the line _p h_ and is lighter in proportion as it is | ||||
nearer to the line _o c_. Let the light _a b_, be a window, and let | ||||
the dark wall in which this window is, be _b s_, that is, one of the | ||||
sides of the wall. | ||||
Then we may say that the line _p h_ is darker than any other part of | ||||
the space _o p c h_, because this line faces the whole surface in | ||||
shadow of [Footnote: In the original the diagram is placed between | ||||
lines 27 and 28.] the wall _b s_. The line _o c_ is lighter than the | ||||
other part of this space _o p c h_, because this line faces the | ||||
luminous space _a b_. | ||||
Where the shadow is larger, or smaller, or equal the body which | ||||
casts it. | ||||
[First of the character of divided lights. [Footnote 14: _lumi | ||||
divisi_. The text here breaks off abruptly.] | ||||
OF THE COMPOUND SHADOW _F, R, C, H_ CAUSED BY A SINGLE LIGHT. | ||||
The shadow _f r c h_ is under such conditions as that where it is | ||||
farthest from its inner side it loses depth in proportion. To prove | ||||
this: | ||||
Let _d a_, be the light and _f n_ the solid body, and let _a e_ be | ||||
one of the side walls of the window that is _d a_. Then I | ||||
say--according to the 2nd [proposition]: that the surface of any | ||||
body is affected by the tone of the objects surrounding it,--that | ||||
the side _r c_, which faces the dark wall _a e_ must participate of | ||||
its darkness and, in the same way that the outer surface which faces | ||||
the light _d a_ participates of the light; thus we get the outlines | ||||
of the extremes on each side of the centre included between them.] | ||||
This is divided into four parts. The first the extremes, which | ||||
include the compound shadow, secondly the compound shadow between | ||||
these extremes. | ||||
179. | ||||
THE ACTION OF THE LIGHT AS FROM ITS CENTRE. | ||||
If it were the whole of the light that caused the shadows beyond the | ||||
bodies placed in front of it, it would follow that any body much | ||||
smaller than the light would cast a pyramidal shadow; but experience | ||||
not showing this, it must be the centre of the light that produces | ||||
this effect. | ||||
[Footnote: The diagram belonging to this passage is between lines 4 | ||||
and 5 in the original. Comp. the reproduction Pl. IV, No. 4. The | ||||
text and drawing of this chapter have already been published with | ||||
tolerable accuracy. See M. JORDAN: "_Das Malerbuch des Leonardo da | ||||
Vinci_". Leipzig 1873, P. 90.] | ||||
PROOF. | ||||
Let _a b_ be the width of the light from a window, which falls on a | ||||
stick set up at one foot from _a c_ [Footnote 6: _bastone_ (stick). | ||||
The diagram has a sphere in place of a stick.]. And let _a d_ be the | ||||
space where all the light from the window is visible. At _c e_ that | ||||
part of the window which is between _l b_ cannot be seen. In the | ||||
same way _a m_ cannot be seen from _d f_ and therefore in these two | ||||
portions the light begins to fail. | ||||
Shadow as produced by two lights of different size (180. 181). | ||||
180. | ||||
A body in light and shade placed between two equal lights side by | ||||
side will cast shadows in proportion to the [amount of] light. And | ||||
the shadows will be one darker than the other in proportion as one | ||||
light is nearer to the said body than the other on the opposite | ||||
side. | ||||
A body placed at an equal distance between two lights will cast two | ||||
shadows, one deeper than the other in proportion, as the light which | ||||
causes it is brighter than the other. | ||||
[Footnote: In the MS. the larger diagram is placed above the first | ||||
line; the smaller one between l. 4 & 5.] | ||||
181. | ||||
A light which is smaller than the body it illuminates produces | ||||
shadows of which the outlines end within [the surface of] the body, | ||||
and not much compound shadow; and falls on less than half of it. A | ||||
light which is larger than the body it illuminates, falls on more | ||||
than half of it, and produces much compound shadow. | ||||
The effect of light at different distances. | ||||
182. | ||||
OF THE SHADOW CAST BY A BODY PLACED BETWEEN 2 EQUAL LIGHTS. | ||||
A body placed between 2 equal lights will cast 2 shadows of itself | ||||
in the direction of the lines of the 2 lights; and if you move this | ||||
body placing it nearer to one of the lights the shadow cast towards | ||||
the nearer light will be less deep than that which falls towards the | ||||
more distant one. | ||||
Further complications in the derived shadows (183-187). | ||||
183. | ||||
The greatest depth of shadow is in the simple derived shadow because | ||||
it is not lighted by either of the two lights _a b, c d_. | ||||
The next less deep shadow is the derived shadow _e f n_; and in this | ||||
the shadow is less by half, because it is illuminated by a single | ||||
light, that is _c d_. | ||||
This is uniform in natural tone because it is lighted throughout by | ||||
one only of the two luminous bodies [10]. But it varies with the | ||||
conditions of shadow, inasmuch as the farther it is away from the | ||||
light the less it is illuminated by it [13]. | ||||
The third degree of depth is the middle shadow [Footnote 15: We | ||||
gather from what follows that _q g r_ here means _ombra media_ (the | ||||
middle shadow).]. But this is not uniform in natural tone; because | ||||
the nearer it gets to the simple derived shadow the deeper it is | ||||
[Footnote 18: Compare lines 10-13], and it is the uniformly gradual | ||||
diminution by increase of distance which is what modifies it | ||||
[Footnote 20: See Footnote 18]: that is to say the depth of a shadow | ||||
increases in proportion to the distance from the two lights. | ||||
The fourth is the shadow _k r s_ and this is all the darker in | ||||
natural tone in proportion as it is nearer to _k s_, because it gets | ||||
less of the light _a o_, but by the accident [of distance] it is | ||||
rendered less deep, because it is nearer to the light _c d_, and | ||||
thus is always exposed to both lights. | ||||
The fifth is less deep in shadow than either of the others because | ||||
it is always entirely exposed to one of the lights and to the whole | ||||
or part of the other; and it is less deep in proportion as it is | ||||
nearer to the two lights, and in proportion as it is turned towards | ||||
the outer side _x t_; because it is more exposed to the second light | ||||
_a b_. | ||||
[Footnote: The diagram to this section is given on Pl. V. To the | ||||
left is the facsimile of the beginning of the text belonging to it.] | ||||
184. | ||||
OF SIMPLE SHADOWS. | ||||
Why, at the intersections _a_, _b_ of the two compound shadows _e f_ | ||||
and _m e_, is a simple shadow pfoduced as at _e h_ and _m g_, while | ||||
no such simple shadow is produced at the other two intersections _c | ||||
d_ made by the very same compound shadows? | ||||
ANSWER. | ||||
Compound shadow are a mixture of light and shade and simple shadows | ||||
are simply darkness. Hence, of the two lights _n_ and _o_, one falls | ||||
on the compound shadow from one side, and the other on the compound | ||||
shadow from the other side, but where they intersect no light falls, | ||||
as at _a b_; therefore it is a simple shadow. Where there is a | ||||
compound shadow one light or the other falls; and here a difficulty | ||||
arises for my adversary since he says that, where the compound | ||||
shadows intersect, both the lights which produce the shadows must of | ||||
necessity fall and therefore these shadows ought to be neutralised; | ||||
inasmuch as the two lights do not fall there, we say that the shadow | ||||
is a simple one and where only one of the two lights falls, we say | ||||
the shadow is compound, and where both the lights fall the shadow is | ||||
neutralised; for where both lights fall, no shadow of any kind is | ||||
produced, but only a light background limiting the shadow. Here I | ||||
shall say that what my adversary said was true: but he only mentions | ||||
such truths as are in his favour; and if we go on to the rest he | ||||
must conclude that my proposition is true. And that is: That if both | ||||
lights fell on the point of intersection, the shadows would be | ||||
neutralised. This I confess to be true if [neither of] the two | ||||
shadows fell in the same spot; because, where a shadow and a light | ||||
fall, a compound shadow is produced, and wherever two shadows or two | ||||
equal lights fall, the shadow cannot vary in any part of it, the | ||||
shadows and the lights both being equal. And this is proved in the | ||||
eighth [proposition] on proportion where it is said that if a given | ||||
quantity has a single unit of force and resistance, a double | ||||
quantity will have double force and double resistance. | ||||
DEFINITION. | ||||
The intersection _n_ is produced by the shadows caused by the light | ||||
_b_, because this light _b_ produces the shadow _x b_, and the | ||||
shadow _s b_, but the intersection _m_ is produced by the light _a_ | ||||
which causes the shadow _s a_, and the shadow _x a_. | ||||
But if you uncover both the lights _a b_, then you get the two | ||||
shadows _n m_ both at once, and besides these, two other, simple | ||||
shadows are produced at _r o_ where neither of the two lights falls | ||||
at all. The grades of depth in compound shadows are fewer in | ||||
proportion as the lights falling on, and crossing them are less | ||||
numerous. | ||||
186. | ||||
Why the intersections at _n_ being composed of two compound derived | ||||
shadows, forms a compound shadow and not a simple one, as happens | ||||
with other intersections of compound shadows. This occurs, according | ||||
to the 2nd [diagram] of this [prop.] which says:--The intersection | ||||
of derived shadows when produced by the intersection of columnar | ||||
shadows caused by a single light does not produce a simple shadow. | ||||
And this is the corollary of the 1st [prop.] which says:--The | ||||
intersection of simple derived shadows never results in a deeper | ||||
shadow, because the deepest shadows all added together cannot be | ||||
darker than one by itself. Since, if many deepest shadows increased | ||||
in depth by their duplication, they could not be called the | ||||
_deepest_ shadows, but only part-shadows. But if such intersections | ||||
are illuminated by a second light placed between the eye and the | ||||
intersecting bodies, then those shadows would become compound | ||||
shadows and be uniformly dark just as much at the intersection as | ||||
throughout the rest. In the 1st and 2nd above, the intersections _i | ||||
k_ will not be doubled in depth as it is doubled in quantity. But in | ||||
this 3rd, at the intersections _g n_ they will be double in depth | ||||
and in quantity. | ||||
187. | ||||
HOW AND WHEN THE SURROUNDINGS IN SHADOW MINGLE THEIR DERIVED SHADOW | ||||
WITH THE LIGHT DERIVED FROM THE LUMINOUS BODY. | ||||
The derived shadow of the dark walls on each side of the bright | ||||
light of the window are what mingle their various degrees of shade | ||||
with the light derived from the window; and these various depths of | ||||
shade modify every portion of the light, except where it is | ||||
strongest, at _c_. To prove this let _d a_ be the primary shadow | ||||
which is turned towards the point _e_, and darkens it by its derived | ||||
shadow; as may be seen by the triangle _a e d_, in which the | ||||
angle _e_ faces the darkened base _d a e_; the point _v_ faces the | ||||
dark shadow _a s_ which is part of _a d_, and as the whole is | ||||
greater than a part, _e_ which faces the whole base [of the | ||||
triangle], will be in deeper shadow than _v_ which only faces part | ||||
of it. In consequence of the conclusion [shown] in the above | ||||
diagram, _t_ will be less darkened than _v_, because the base of the | ||||
_t_ is part of the base of the _v_; and in the same way it follows | ||||
that _p_ is less in shadow than _t_, because the base of the _p_ is | ||||
part of the base of the _t_. And _c_ is the terminal point of the | ||||
derived shadow and the chief beginning of the highest light. | ||||
[Footnote: The diagram on Pl. IV, No. 5 belongs to this passage; but | ||||
it must be noted that the text explains only the figure on the | ||||
right-hand side.] | ||||
FOURTH BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE. | ||||
On the shape of the cast shadows (188-191). | ||||
188. | ||||
The form of the shadow cast by any body of uniform density can never | ||||
be the same as that of the body producing it. [Footnote: Comp. the | ||||
drawing on PI. XXVIII, No. 5.] | ||||
189. | ||||
No cast shadow can produce the true image of the body which casts it | ||||
on a vertical plane unless the centre of the light is equally | ||||
distant from all the edges of that body. | ||||
190. | ||||
If a window _a b_ admits the sunlight into a room, the sunlight will | ||||
magnify the size of the window and diminish the shadow of a man in | ||||
such a way as that when the man makes that dim shadow of himself, | ||||
approach to that which defines the real size of the window, he will | ||||
see the shadows where they come into contact, dim and confused from | ||||
the strength of the light, shutting off and not allowing the solar | ||||
rays to pass; the effect of the shadow of the man cast by this | ||||
contact will be exactly that figured above. | ||||
[Footnote: It is scarcely possible to render the meaning of this | ||||
sentence with strict accuracy; mainly because the grammatical | ||||
construction is defective in the most important part--line 4. In the | ||||
very slight original sketch the shadow touches the upper arch of the | ||||
window and the correction, here given is perhaps not justified.] | ||||
191. | ||||
A shadow is never seen as of uniform depth on the surface which | ||||
intercepts it unless every portion of that surface is equidistant | ||||
from the luminous body. This is proved by the 7th which says:--The | ||||
shadow will appear lighter or stronger as it is surrounded by a | ||||
darker or a lighter background. And by the 8th of this:--The | ||||
background will be in parts darker or lighter, in proportion as it | ||||
is farther from or nearer to the luminous body. And:--Of various | ||||
spots equally distant from the luminous body those will always be in | ||||
the highest light on which the rays fall at the smallest angles: The | ||||
outline of the shadow as it falls on inequalities in the surface | ||||
will be seen with all the contours similar to those of the body that | ||||
casts it, if the eye is placed just where the centre of the light | ||||
was. | ||||
The shadow will look darkest where it is farthest from the body that | ||||
casts it. The shadow _c d_, cast by the body in shadow _a b_ which | ||||
is equally distant in all parts, is not of equal depth because it is | ||||
seen on a back ground of varying brightness. [Footnote: Compare the | ||||
three diagrams on Pl. VI, no 1 which, in the original accompany this | ||||
section.] | ||||
On the outlines of cast shadows (192-195). | ||||
192. | ||||
The edges of a derived shadow will be most distinct where it is cast | ||||
nearest to the primary shadow. | ||||
193. | ||||
As the derived shadow gets more distant from the primary shadow, the | ||||
more the cast shadow differs from the primary shadow. | ||||
194. | ||||
OF SHADOWS WHICH NEVER COME TO AN END. | ||||
The greater the difference between a light and the body lighted by | ||||
it, the light being the larger, the more vague will be the outlines | ||||
of the shadow of that object. | ||||
The derived shadow will be most confused towards the edges of its | ||||
interception by a plane, where it is remotest from the body casting | ||||
it. | ||||
195. | ||||
What is the cause which makes the outlines of the shadow vague and | ||||
confused? | ||||
Whether it is possible to give clear and definite outlines to the | ||||
edges of shadows. | ||||
On the relative size of shadows (196. 197). | ||||
196. | ||||
THE BODY WHICH IS NEAREST TO THE LIGHT CASTS THE LARGEST SHADOW, AND | ||||
WHY? | ||||
If an object placed in front of a single light is very close to it | ||||
you will see that it casts a very large shadow on the opposite wall, | ||||
and the farther you remove the object from the light the smaller | ||||
will the image of the shadow become. | ||||
WHY A SHADOW LARGER THAN THE BODY THAT PRODUCES IT BECOMES OUT OF | ||||
PROPORTION. | ||||
The disproportion of a shadow which is larger than the body | ||||
producing it, results from the light being smaller than the body, so | ||||
that it cannot be at an equal distance from the edges of the body | ||||
[Footnote 11: H. LUDWIG in his edition of the old copies, in the | ||||
Vatican library--in which this chapter is included under Nos. 612, | ||||
613 and 614 alters this passage as follows: _quella parte ch'e piu | ||||
propinqua piu cresce che le distanti_, although the Vatican copy | ||||
agrees with the original MS. in having _distante_ in the former and | ||||
_propinque_ in the latter place. This supposed amendment seems to me | ||||
to invert the facts. Supposing for instance, that on Pl. XXXI No. 3. | ||||
_f_ is the spot where the light is that illuminates the figure there | ||||
represented, and that the line behind the figure represents a wall | ||||
on which the shadow of the figure is thrown. It is evident, that in | ||||
that case the nearest portion, in this case the under part of the | ||||
thigh, is very little magnified in the shadow, and the remoter | ||||
parts, for instance the head, are more magnified.]; and the portions | ||||
which are most remote are made larger than the nearer portions for | ||||
this reason [Footnote 12: See Footnote 11]. | ||||
WHY A SHADOW WHICH IS LARGER THAN THE BODY CAUSING IT HAS | ||||
ILL-DEFINED OUTLINES. | ||||
The atmosphere which surrounds a light is almost like light itself | ||||
for brightness and colour; but the farther off it is the more it | ||||
loses this resemblance. An object which casts a large shadow and is | ||||
near to the light, is illuminated both by that light by the luminous | ||||
atmosphere; hence this diffused light gives the shadow ill-defined | ||||
edges. | ||||
197. | ||||
A luminous body which is long and narrow in shape gives more | ||||
confused outlines to the derived shadow than a spherical light, and | ||||
this contradicts the proposition next following: A shadow will have | ||||
its outlines more clearly defined in proportion as it is nearer to | ||||
the primary shadow or, I should say, the body casting the shadow; | ||||
[Footnote 14: The lettering refers to the lower diagram, Pl. XLI, | ||||
No. 5.] the cause of this is the elongated form of the luminous body | ||||
_a c_, &c. [Footnote 16: See Footnote 14]. | ||||
Effects on cast shadows by the tone of the back ground. | ||||
198. | ||||
OF MODIFIED SHADOWS. | ||||
Modified shadows are those which are cast on light walls or other | ||||
illuminated objects. | ||||
A shadow looks darkest against a light background. The outlines of a | ||||
derived shadow will be clearer as they are nearer to the primary | ||||
shadow. A derived shadow will be most defined in shape where it is | ||||
intercepted, where the plane intercepts it at the most equal angle. | ||||
Those parts of a shadow will appear darkest which have darker | ||||
objects opposite to them. And they will appear less dark when they | ||||
face lighter objects. And the larger the light object opposite, the | ||||
more the shadow will be lightened. | ||||
And the larger the surface of the dark object the more it will | ||||
darken the derived shadow where it is intercepted. | ||||
A disputed proposition. | ||||
199. | ||||
OF THE OPINION OF SOME THAT A TRIANGLE CASTS NO SHADOW ON A PLANE | ||||
SURFACE. | ||||
Certain mathematicians have maintained that a triangle, of which the | ||||
base is turned to the light, casts no shadow on a plane; and this | ||||
they prove by saying [5] that no spherical body smaller than the | ||||
light can reach the middle with the shadow. The lines of radiant | ||||
light are straight lines [6]; therefore, suppose the light to be _g | ||||
h_ and the triangle _l m n_, and let the plane be _i k_; they say | ||||
the light _g_ falls on the side of the triangle _l n_, and the | ||||
portion of the plane _i q_. Thus again _h_ like _g_ falls on the | ||||
side _l m_, and then on _m n_ and the plane _p k_; and if the whole | ||||
plane thus faces the lights _g h_, it is evident that the triangle | ||||
has no shadow; and that which has no shadow can cast none. This, in | ||||
this case appears credible. But if the triangle _n p g_ were not | ||||
illuminated by the two lights _g_ and _h_, but by _i p_ and _g_ and | ||||
_k_ neither side is lighted by more than one single light: that is | ||||
_i p_ is invisible to _h g_ and _k_ will never be lighted by _g_; | ||||
hence _p q_ will be twice as light as the two visible portions that | ||||
are in shadow. | ||||
[Footnote: 5--6. This passage is so obscure that it would be rash to | ||||
offer an explanation. Several words seem to have been omitted.] | ||||
On the relative depth of cast shadows (200-202). | ||||
200. | ||||
A spot is most in the shade when a large number of darkened rays | ||||
fall upon it. The spot which receives the rays at the widest angle | ||||
and by darkened rays will be most in the dark; a will be twice as | ||||
dark as b, because it originates from twice as large a base at an | ||||
equal distance. A spot is most illuminated when a large number of | ||||
luminous rays fall upon it. d is the beginning of the shadow _d f_, | ||||
and tinges _c_ but _a_ little; _d e_ is half of the shadow _d f_ and | ||||
gives a deeper tone where it is cast at _b_ than at _f_. And the | ||||
whole shaded space _e_ gives its tone to the spot _a_. [Footnote: | ||||
The diagram here referred to is on Pl. XLI, No. 2.] | ||||
201. | ||||
_A n_ will be darker than _c r_ in proportion to the number of times | ||||
that _a b_ goes into _c d_. | ||||
202. | ||||
The shadow cast by an object on a plane will be smaller in | ||||
proportion as that object is lighted by feebler rays. Let _d e_ be | ||||
the object and _d c_ the plane surface; the number of times that _d | ||||
e_ will go into _f g_ gives the proportion of light at _f h_ to _d | ||||
c_. The ray of light will be weaker in proportion to its distance | ||||
from the hole through which it falls. | ||||
FIFTH BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE. | ||||
Principles of reflection (203. 204). | ||||
203. | ||||
OF THE WAY IN WHICH THE SHADOWS CAST BY OBJECTS OUGHT TO BE DEFINED. | ||||
If the object is the mountain here figured, and the light is at the | ||||
point _a_, I say that from _b d_ and also from _c f_ there will be | ||||
no light but from reflected rays. And this results from the fact | ||||
that rays of light can only act in straight lines; and the same is | ||||
the case with the secondary or reflected rays. | ||||
204. | ||||
The edges of the derived shadow are defined by the hues of the | ||||
illuminated objects surrounding the luminous body which produces the | ||||
shadow. | ||||
On reverberation. | ||||
205. | ||||
OF REVERBERATION. | ||||
Reverberation is caused by bodies of a bright nature with a flat and | ||||
semi opaque surface which, when the light strikes upon them, throw | ||||
it back again, like the rebound of a ball, to the former object. | ||||
WHERE THERE CAN BE NO REFLECTED LIGHTS. | ||||
All dense bodies have their surfaces occupied by various degrees of | ||||
light and shade. The lights are of two kinds, one called original, | ||||
the other borrowed. Original light is that which is inherent in the | ||||
flame of fire or the light of the sun or of the atmosphere. Borrowed | ||||
light will be reflected light; but to return to the promised | ||||
definition: I say that this luminous reverberation is not produced | ||||
by those portions of a body which are turned towards darkened | ||||
objects, such as shaded spots, fields with grass of various height, | ||||
woods whether green or bare; in which, though that side of each | ||||
branch which is turned towards the original light has a share of | ||||
that light, nevertheless the shadows cast by each branch separately | ||||
are so numerous, as well as those cast by one branch on the others, | ||||
that finally so much shadow is the result that the light counts for | ||||
nothing. Hence objects of this kind cannot throw any reflected light | ||||
on opposite objects. | ||||
Reflection on water (206. 207). | ||||
206. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
The shadow or object mirrored in water in motion, that is to say in | ||||
small wavelets, will always be larger than the external object | ||||
producing it. | ||||
207. | ||||
It is impossible that an object mirrored on water should correspond | ||||
in form to the object mirrored, since the centre of the eye is above | ||||
the surface of the water. | ||||
This is made plain in the figure here given, which demonstrates that | ||||
the eye sees the surface _a b_, and cannot see it at _l f_, and at | ||||
_r t_; it sees the surface of the image at _r t_, and does not see | ||||
it in the real object _c d_. Hence it is impossible to see it, as | ||||
has been said above unless the eye itself is situated on the surface | ||||
of the water as is shown below [13]. | ||||
[Footnote: _A_ stands for _ochio_ [eye], _B_ for _aria_ [air], _C_ | ||||
for _acqua_ [water], _D_ for _cateto_ [cathetus].--In the original | ||||
MS. the second diagram is placed below line 13.] | ||||
Experiments with the mirror (208-210). | ||||
208. | ||||
THE MIRROR. | ||||
If the illuminated object is of the same size as the luminous body | ||||
and as that in which the light is reflected, the amount of the | ||||
reflected light will bear the same proportion to the intermediate | ||||
light as this second light will bear to the first, if both bodies | ||||
are smooth and white. | ||||
209. | ||||
Describe how it is that no object has its limitation in the mirror | ||||
but in the eye which sees it in the mirror. For if you look at your | ||||
face in the mirror, the part resembles the whole in as much as the | ||||
part is everywhere in the mirror, and the whole is in every part of | ||||
the same mirror; and the same is true of the whole image of any | ||||
object placed opposite to this mirror, &c. | ||||
210. | ||||
No man can see the image of another man in a mirror in its proper | ||||
place with regard to the objects; because every object falls on [the | ||||
surface of] the mirror at equal angles. And if the one man, who sees | ||||
the other in the mirror, is not in a direct line with the image he | ||||
will not see it in the place where it really falls; and if he gets | ||||
into the line, he covers the other man and puts himself in the place | ||||
occupied by his image. Let _n o_ be the mirror, _b_ the eye of your | ||||
friend and _d_ your own eye. Your friend's eye will appear to you at | ||||
_a_, and to him it will seem that yours is at _c_, and the | ||||
intersection of the visual rays will occur at _m_, so that either of | ||||
you touching _m_ will touch the eye of the other man which shall be | ||||
open. And if you touch the eye of the other man in the mirror it | ||||
will seem to him that you are touching your own. | ||||
Appendix:--On shadows in movement (211. 212). | ||||
211. | ||||
OF THE SHADOW AND ITS MOTION. | ||||
When two bodies casting shadows, and one in front of the other, are | ||||
between a window and the wall with some space between them, the | ||||
shadow of the body which is nearest to the plane of the wall will | ||||
move if the body nearest to the window is put in transverse motion | ||||
across the window. To prove this let _a_ and _b_ be two bodies | ||||
placed between the window _n m_ and the plane surface _o p_ with | ||||
sufficient space between them as shown by the space _a b_. I say | ||||
that if the body _a_ is moved towards _s_ the shadow of the body _b_ | ||||
which is at _c_ will move towards _d_. | ||||
212. | ||||
OF THE MOTION OF SHADOWS. | ||||
The motion of a shadow is always more rapid than that of the body | ||||
which produces it if the light is stationary. To prove this let _a_ | ||||
be the luminous body, and _b_ the body casting the shadow, and _d_ | ||||
the shadow. Then I say that in the time while the solid body moves | ||||
from _b_ to _c_, the shadow _d_ will move to _e_; and this | ||||
proportion in the rapidity of the movements made in the same space | ||||
of time, is equal to that in the length of the space moved over. | ||||
Thus, given the proportion of the space moved over by the body _b_ | ||||
to _c_, to that moved over by the shadow _d_ to _e_, the proportion | ||||
in the rapidity of their movements will be the same. | ||||
But if the luminous body is also in movement with a velocity equal | ||||
to that of the solid body, then the shadow and the body that casts | ||||
it will move with equal speed. And if the luminous body moves more | ||||
rapidly than the solid body, the motion of the shadow will be slower | ||||
than that of the body casting it. | ||||
But if the luminous body moves more slowly than the solid body, then | ||||
the shadow will move more rapidly than that body. | ||||
SIXTH BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE. | ||||
The effect of rays passing through holes (213. 214). | ||||
213. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
If you transmit the rays of the sun through a hole in the shape of a | ||||
star you will see a beautiful effect of perspective in the spot | ||||
where the sun's rays fall. | ||||
[Footnote: In this and the following chapters of MS. C the order of | ||||
the original paging has been adhered to, and is shown in | ||||
parenthesis. Leonardo himself has but rarely worked out the subject | ||||
of these propositions. The space left for the purpose has | ||||
occasionally been made use of for quite different matter. Even the | ||||
numerous diagrams, most of them very delicately sketched, lettered | ||||
and numbered, which occur on these pages, are hardly ever explained, | ||||
with the exception of those few which are here given.] | ||||
214. | ||||
No small hole can so modify the convergence of rays of light as to | ||||
prevent, at a long distance, the transmission of the true form of | ||||
the luminous body causing them. It is impossible that rays of light | ||||
passing through a parallel [slit], should not display the form of | ||||
the body causing them, since all the effects produced by a luminous | ||||
body are [in fact] the reflection of that body: The moon, shaped | ||||
like a boat, if transmitted through a hole is figured in the surface | ||||
[it falls on] as a boatshaped object. [Footnote 8: In the MS. a | ||||
blank space is left after this question.] Why the eye sees bodies at | ||||
a distance, larger than they measure on the vertical plane?. | ||||
[Footnote: This chapter, taken from another MS. may, as an | ||||
exception, be placed here, as it refers to the same subject as the | ||||
preceding section.] | ||||
On gradation of shadows (215. 216). | ||||
215. | ||||
Although the breadth and length of lights and shadow will be | ||||
narrower and shorter in foreshortening, the quality and quantity of | ||||
the light and shade is not increased nor diminished. | ||||
[3]The function of shade and light when diminished by | ||||
foreshortening, will be to give shadow and to illuminate an object | ||||
opposite, according to the quality and quantity in which they fall | ||||
on the body. | ||||
[5]In proportion as a derived shadow is nearer to its penultimate | ||||
extremities the deeper it will appear, _g z_ beyond the intersection | ||||
faces only the part of the shadow [marked] _y z_; this by | ||||
intersection takes the shadow from _m n_ but by direct line it takes | ||||
the shadow _a m_ hence it is twice as deep as _g z_. _Y x_, by | ||||
intersection takes the shadow _n o_, but by direct line the shadow | ||||
_n m a_, therefore _x y_ is three times as dark as _z g_; _x f_, by | ||||
intersection faces _o b_ and by direct line _o n m a_, therefore we | ||||
must say that the shadow between _f x_ will be four times as dark as | ||||
the shadow _z g_, because it faces four times as much shadow. | ||||
Let _a b_ be the side where the primary shadow is, and _b c_ the | ||||
primary light, _d_ will be the spot where it is intercepted,_f g_ | ||||
the derived shadow and _f e_ the derived light. | ||||
And this must be at the beginning of the explanation. | ||||
[Footnote: In the original MS. the text of No. 252 precedes the one | ||||
given here. In the text of No. 215 there is a blank space of about | ||||
four lines between the lines 2 and 3. The diagram given on Pl. VI, | ||||
No. 2 is placed between lines 4 and 5. Between lines 5 and 6 there | ||||
is another space of about three lines and one line left blank | ||||
between lines 8 and 9. The reader will find the meaning of the whole | ||||
passage much clearer if he first reads the final lines 11--13. | ||||
Compare also line 4 of No. 270.] | ||||
On relative proportion of light and shadows (216--221). | ||||
216. | ||||
That part of the surface of a body on which the images [reflection] | ||||
from other bodies placed opposite fall at the largest angle will | ||||
assume their hue most strongly. In the diagram below, 8 is a larger | ||||
angle than 4, since its base _a n_ is larger than _e n_ the base of | ||||
4. This diagram below should end at _a n_ 4 8. [4]That portion of | ||||
the illuminated surface on which a shadow is cast will be brightest | ||||
which lies contiguous to the cast shadow. Just as an object which is | ||||
lighted up by a greater quantity of luminous rays becomes brighter, | ||||
so one on which a greater quantity of shadow falls, will be darker. | ||||
Let 4 be the side of an illuminated surface 4 8, surrounding the | ||||
cast shadow _g e_ 4. And this spot 4 will be lighter than 8, because | ||||
less shadow falls on it than on 8. Since 4 faces only the shadow _i | ||||
n_; and 8 faces and receives the shadow _a e_ as well as _i n_ which | ||||
makes it twice as dark. And the same thing happens when you put the | ||||
atmosphere and the sun in the place of shade and light. | ||||
[12] The distribution of shadow, originating in, and limited by, | ||||
plane surfaces placed near to each other, equal in tone and directly | ||||
opposite, will be darker at the ends than at the beginning, which | ||||
will be determined by the incidence of the luminous rays. You will | ||||
find the same proportion in the depth of the derived shadows _a n_ | ||||
as in the nearness of the luminous bodies _m b_, which cause them; | ||||
and if the luminous bodies were of equal size you would still | ||||
farther find the same proportion in the light cast by the luminous | ||||
circles and their shadows as in the distance of the said luminous | ||||
bodies. | ||||
[Footnote: The diagram originally placed between lines 3 and 4 is on | ||||
Pl. VI, No. 3. In the diagram given above line 14 of the original, | ||||
and here printed in the text, the words _corpo luminoso_ [luminous | ||||
body] are written in the circle _m_, _luminoso_ in the circle _b_ | ||||
and _ombroso_ [body in shadow] in the circle _o_.] | ||||
217. | ||||
THAT PART OF THE REFLECTION WILL BE BRIGHTEST WHERE THE REFLECTED | ||||
RAYS ARE SHORTEST. | ||||
[2] The darkness occasioned by the casting of combined shadows will | ||||
be in conformity with its cause, which will originate and terminate | ||||
between two plane surfaces near together, alike in tone and directly | ||||
opposite each other. | ||||
[4] In proportion as the source of light is larger, the luminous and | ||||
shadow rays will be more mixed together. This result is produced | ||||
because wherever there is a larger quantity of luminous rays, there | ||||
is most light, but where there are fewer there is least light, | ||||
consequently the shadow rays come in and mingle with them. | ||||
[Footnote: Diagrams are inserted before lines 2 and 4.] | ||||
218. | ||||
In all the proportions I lay down it must be understood that the | ||||
medium between the bodies is always the same. [2] The smaller the | ||||
luminous body the more distinct will the transmission of the shadows | ||||
be. | ||||
[3] When of two opposite shadows, produced by the same body, one is | ||||
twice as dark as the other though similar in form, one of the two | ||||
lights causing them must have twice the diameter that the other has | ||||
and be at twice the distance from the opaque body. If the object is | ||||
lowly moved across the luminous body, and the shadow is intercepted | ||||
at some distance from the object, there will be the same relative | ||||
proportion between the motion of the derived shadow and the motion | ||||
of the primary shadow, as between the distance from the object to | ||||
the light, and that from the object to the spot where the shadow is | ||||
intercepted; so that though the object is moved slowly the shadow | ||||
moves fast. | ||||
[Footnote: There are diagrams inserted before lines 2 and 3 but they | ||||
are not reproduced here. The diagram above line 6 is written upon as | ||||
follows: at _A lume_ (light), at _B obbietto_ (body), at _C ombra | ||||
d'obbietto_ (shadow of the object).] | ||||
219. | ||||
A luminous body will appear less brilliant when surrounded by a | ||||
bright background. | ||||
[2] I have found that the stars which are nearest to the horizon | ||||
look larger than the others because light falls upon them from a | ||||
larger proportion of the solar body than when they are above us; and | ||||
having more light from the sun they give more light, and the bodies | ||||
which are most luminous appear the largest. As may be seen by the | ||||
sun through a mist, and overhead; it appears larger where there is | ||||
no mist and diminished through mist. No portion of the luminous body | ||||
is ever visible from any spot within the pyramid of pure derived | ||||
shadow. | ||||
[Footnote: Between lines 1 and 2 there is in the original a large | ||||
diagram which does not refer to this text. ] | ||||
220. | ||||
A body on which the solar rays fall between the thin branches of | ||||
trees far apart will cast but a single shadow. | ||||
[2] If an opaque body and a luminous one are (both) spherical the | ||||
base of the pyramid of rays will bear the same proportion to the | ||||
luminous body as the base of the pyramid of shade to the opaque | ||||
body. | ||||
[4] When the transmitted shadow is intercepted by a plane surface | ||||
placed opposite to it and farther away from the luminous body than | ||||
from the object [which casts it] it will appear proportionately | ||||
darker and the edges more distinct. | ||||
[Footnote: The diagram which, in the original, is placed above line | ||||
2, is similar to the one, here given on page 73 (section 120).--The | ||||
diagram here given in the margin stands, in the original, between | ||||
lines 3 and 4.] | ||||
221. | ||||
A body illuminated by the solar rays passing between the thick | ||||
branches of trees will produce as many shadows as there are branches | ||||
between the sun and itself. | ||||
Where the shadow-rays from an opaque pyramidal body are intercepted | ||||
they will cast a shadow of bifurcate outline and various depth at | ||||
the points. A light which is broader than the apex but narrower than | ||||
the base of an opaque pyramidal body placed in front of it, will | ||||
cause that pyramid to cast a shadow of bifurcate form and various | ||||
degrees of depth. | ||||
If an opaque body, smaller than the light, casts two shadows and if | ||||
it is the same size or larger, casts but one, it follows that a | ||||
pyramidal body, of which part is smaller, part equal to, and part | ||||
larger than, the luminous body, will cast a bifurcate shadow. | ||||
[Footnote: Between lines 2 and 3 there are in the original two large | ||||
diagrams.] | ||||
_IV._ | ||||
_Perspective of Disappearance._ | ||||
_The theory of the_ "Prospettiva de' perdimenti" _would, in many | ||||
important details, be quite unintelligible if it had not been led up | ||||
by the principles of light and shade on which it is based. The word_ | ||||
"Prospettiva" _in the language of the time included the principles | ||||
of optics; what Leonardo understood by_ "Perdimenti" _will be | ||||
clearly seen in the early chapters, Nos._ 222--224. _It is in the | ||||
very nature of the case that the farther explanations given in the | ||||
subsequent chapters must be limited to general rules. The sections | ||||
given as_ 227--231 _"On indistinctness at short distances" have, it | ||||
is true, only an indirect bearing on the subject; but on the other | ||||
hand, the following chapters,_ 232--234, _"On indistinctness at | ||||
great distances," go fully into the matter, and in chapters_ | ||||
235--239, _which treat "Of the importance of light and shade in the | ||||
Perspective of Disappearance", the practical issues are distinctly | ||||
insisted on in their relation to the theory. This is naturally | ||||
followed by the statements as to "the effect of light or dark | ||||
backgrounds on the apparent size of bodies"_ (_Nos._ 240--250). _At | ||||
the end I have placed, in the order of the original, those sections | ||||
from the MS._ C _which treat of the "Perspective of Disappearance" | ||||
and serve to some extent to complete the treatment of the subject_ | ||||
(251--262). | ||||
Definition (222. 223). | ||||
222. | ||||
OF THE DIMINISHED DISTINCTNESS OF THE OUTLINES OF OPAQUE BODIES. | ||||
If the real outlines of opaque bodies are indistinguishable at even | ||||
a very short distance, they will be more so at long distances; and, | ||||
since it is by its outlines that we are able to know the real form | ||||
of any opaque body, when by its remoteness we fail to discern it as | ||||
a whole, much more must we fail to discern its parts and outlines. | ||||
223. | ||||
OF THE DIMINUTION IN PERSPECTIVE OF OPAQUE OBJECTS. | ||||
Among opaque objects of equal size the apparent diminution of size | ||||
will be in proportion to their distance from the eye of the | ||||
spectator; but it is an inverse proportion, since, where the | ||||
distance is greater, the opaque body will appear smaller, and the | ||||
less the distance the larger will the object appear. And this is the | ||||
fundamental principle of linear perspective and it | ||||
follows:--[11]every object as it becomes more remote loses first | ||||
those parts which are smallest. Thus of a horse, we should lose the | ||||
legs before the head, because the legs are thinner than the head; | ||||
and the neck before the body for the same reason. Hence it follows | ||||
that the last part of the horse which would be discernible by the | ||||
eye would be the mass of the body in an oval form, or rather in a | ||||
cylindrical form and this would lose its apparent thickness before | ||||
its length--according to the 2nd rule given above, &c. [Footnote 23: | ||||
Compare line 11.]. | ||||
If the eye remains stationary the perspective terminates in the | ||||
distance in a point. But if the eye moves in a straight [horizontal] | ||||
line the perspective terminates in a line and the reason is that | ||||
this line is generated by the motion of the point and our sight; | ||||
therefore it follows that as we move our sight [eye], the point | ||||
moves, and as we move the point, the line is generated, &c. | ||||
An illustration by experiment. | ||||
224. | ||||
Every visible body, in so far as it affects the eye, includes three | ||||
attributes; that is to say: mass, form and colour; and the mass is | ||||
recognisable at a greater distance from the place of its actual | ||||
existence than either colour or form. Again, colour is discernible | ||||
at a greater distance than form, but this law does not apply to | ||||
luminous bodies. | ||||
The above proposition is plainly shown and proved by experiment; | ||||
because: if you see a man close to you, you discern the exact | ||||
appearance of the mass and of the form and also of the colouring; if | ||||
he goes to some distance you will not recognise who he is, because | ||||
the character of the details will disappear, if he goes still | ||||
farther you will not be able to distinguish his colouring, but he | ||||
will appear as a dark object, and still farther he will appear as a | ||||
very small dark rounded object. It appears rounded because distance | ||||
so greatly diminishes the various details that nothing remains | ||||
visible but the larger mass. And the reason is this: We know very | ||||
well that all the images of objects reach the senses by a small | ||||
aperture in the eye; hence, if the whole horizon _a d_ is admitted | ||||
through such an aperture, the object _b c_ being but a very small | ||||
fraction of this horizon what space can it fill in that minute image | ||||
of so vast a hemisphere? And because luminous bodies have more power | ||||
in darkness than any others, it is evident that, as the chamber of | ||||
the eye is very dark, as is the nature of all colored cavities, the | ||||
images of distant objects are confused and lost in the great light | ||||
of the sky; and if they are visible at all, appear dark and black, | ||||
as every small body must when seen in the diffused light of the | ||||
atmosphere. | ||||
[Footnote: The diagram belonging to this passage is placed between | ||||
lines 5 and 6; it is No. 4 on Pl. VI. ] | ||||
A guiding rule. | ||||
225. | ||||
OF THE ATMOSPHERE THAT INTERPOSES BETWEEN THE EYE AND VISIBLE | ||||
OBJECTS. | ||||
An object will appear more or less distinct at the same distance, in | ||||
proportion as the atmosphere existing between the eye and that | ||||
object is more or less clear. Hence, as I know that the greater or | ||||
less quantity of the air that lies between the eye and the object | ||||
makes the outlines of that object more or less indistinct, you must | ||||
diminish the definiteness of outline of those objects in proportion | ||||
to their increasing distance from the eye of the spectator. | ||||
An experiment. | ||||
226. | ||||
When I was once in a place on the sea, at an equal distance from the | ||||
shore and the mountains, the distance from the shore looked much | ||||
greater than that from the mountains. | ||||
On indistinctness at short distances (227-231). | ||||
227. | ||||
If you place an opaque object in front of your eye at a distance of | ||||
four fingers' breadth, if it is smaller than the space between the | ||||
two eyes it will not interfere with your seeing any thing that may | ||||
be beyond it. No object situated beyond another object seen by the | ||||
eye can be concealed by this [nearer] object if it is smaller than | ||||
the space from eye to eye. | ||||
228. | ||||
The eye cannot take in a luminous angle which is too close to it. | ||||
229. | ||||
That part of a surface will be better lighted on which the light | ||||
falls at the greater angle. And that part, on which the shadow falls | ||||
at the greatest angle, will receive from those rays least of the | ||||
benefit of the light. | ||||
230. | ||||
OF THE EYE. | ||||
The edges of an object placed in front of the pupil of the eye will | ||||
be less distinct in proportion as they are closer to the eye. This | ||||
is shown by the edge of the object _n_ placed in front of the pupil | ||||
_d_; in looking at this edge the pupil also sees all the space _a c_ | ||||
which is beyond the edge; and the images the eye receives from that | ||||
space are mingled with the images of the edge, so that one image | ||||
confuses the other, and this confusion hinders the pupil from | ||||
distinguishing the edge. | ||||
231. | ||||
The outlines of objects will be least clear when they are nearest to | ||||
the eye, and therefore remoter outlines will be clearer. Among | ||||
objects which are smaller than the pupil of the eye those will be | ||||
less distinct which are nearer to the eye. | ||||
On indistinctness at great distances (232-234). | ||||
232. | ||||
Objects near to the eye will appear larger than those at a distance. | ||||
Objects seen with two eyes will appear rounder than if they are seen | ||||
with only one. | ||||
Objects seen between light and shadow will show the most relief. | ||||
233. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
Our true perception of an object diminishes in proportion as its | ||||
size is diminished by distance. | ||||
234. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
Why objects seen at a distance appear large to the eye and in the | ||||
image on the vertical plane they appear small. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
I ask how far away the eye can discern a non-luminous body, as, for | ||||
instance, a mountain. It will be very plainly visible if the sun is | ||||
behind it; and could be seen at a greater or less distance according | ||||
to the sun's place in the sky. | ||||
[Footnote: The clue to the solution of this problem (lines 1-3) is | ||||
given in lines 4-6, No. 232. Objects seen with both eyes appear | ||||
solid since they are seen from two distinct points of sight | ||||
separated by the distance between the eyes, but this solidity cannot | ||||
be represented in a flat drawing. Compare No. 535.] | ||||
The importance of light and shade in the perspective of | ||||
disappearance (235-239). | ||||
235. | ||||
An opaque body seen in a line in which the light falls will reveal | ||||
no prominences to the eye. For instance, let _a_ be the solid body | ||||
and _c_ the light; _c m_ and _c n_ will be the lines of incidence of | ||||
the light, that is to say the lines which transmit the light to the | ||||
object _a_. The eye being at the point _b_, I say that since the | ||||
light _c_ falls on the whole part _m n_ the portions in relief on | ||||
that side will all be illuminated. Hence the eye placed at _c_ | ||||
cannot see any light and shade and, not seeing it, every portion | ||||
will appear of the same tone, therefore the relief in the prominent | ||||
or rounded parts will not be visible. | ||||
236. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
When you represent in your work shadows which you can only discern | ||||
with difficulty, and of which you cannot distinguish the edges so | ||||
that you apprehend them confusedly, you must not make them sharp or | ||||
definite lest your work should have a wooden effect. | ||||
237. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
You will observe in drawing that among the shadows some are of | ||||
undistinguishable gradation and form, as is shown in the 3rd | ||||
[proposition] which says: Rounded surfaces display as many degrees | ||||
of light and shade as there are varieties of brightness and darkness | ||||
reflected from the surrounding objects. | ||||
238. | ||||
OF LIGHT AND SHADE. | ||||
You who draw from nature, look (carefully) at the extent, the | ||||
degree, and the form of the lights and shadows on each muscle; and | ||||
in their position lengthwise observe towards which muscle the axis | ||||
of the central line is directed. | ||||
239. | ||||
An object which is [so brilliantly illuminated as to be] almost as | ||||
bright as light will be visible at a greater distance, and of larger | ||||
apparent size than is natural to objects so remote. | ||||
The effect of light or dark backgrounds on the apparent size of | ||||
objects (240-250). | ||||
240. | ||||
A shadow will appear dark in proportion to the brilliancy of the | ||||
light surrounding it and conversely it will be less conspicuous | ||||
where it is seen against a darker background. | ||||
241. | ||||
OF ORDINARY PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
An object of equal breadth and colour throughout, seen against a | ||||
background of various colours will appear unequal in breadth. | ||||
And if an object of equal breadth throughout, but of various | ||||
colours, is seen against a background of uniform colour, that object | ||||
will appear of various breadth. And the more the colours of the | ||||
background or of the object seen against the ground vary, the | ||||
greater will the apparent variations in the breadth be though the | ||||
objects seen against the ground be of equal breadth [throughout]. | ||||
242. | ||||
A dark object seen against a bright background will appear smaller | ||||
than it is. | ||||
A light object will look larger when it is seen against a background | ||||
darker than itself. | ||||
243. | ||||
OF LIGHT. | ||||
A luminous body when obscured by a dense atmosphere will appear | ||||
smaller; as may be seen by the moon or sun veiled by mists. | ||||
OF LIGHT. | ||||
Of several luminous bodies of equal size and brilliancy and at an | ||||
equal distance, that will look the largest which is surrounded by | ||||
the darkest background. | ||||
OF LIGHT. | ||||
I find that any luminous body when seen through a dense and thick | ||||
mist diminishes in proportion to its distance from the eye. Thus it | ||||
is with the sun by day, as well as the moon and the other eternal | ||||
lights by night. And when the air is clear, these luminaries appear | ||||
larger in proportion as they are farther from the eye. | ||||
244. | ||||
That portion of a body of uniform breadth which is against a lighter | ||||
background will look narrower [than the rest]. | ||||
[4] _e_ is a given object, itself dark and of uniform breadth; _a b_ | ||||
and _c d_ are two backgrounds one darker than the other; _b c_ is a | ||||
bright background, as it might be a spot lighted by the sun through | ||||
an aperture in a dark room. Then I say that the object _e g_ will | ||||
appear larger at _e f_ than at _g h_; because _e f_ has a darker | ||||
background than _g h_; and again at _f g_ it will look narrower from | ||||
being seen by the eye _o_, on the light background _b c_. [Footnote | ||||
12: The diagram to which the text, lines 1-11, refers, is placed in | ||||
the original between lines 3 and 4, and is given on Pl. XLI, No. 3. | ||||
Lines 12 to 14 are explained by the lower of the two diagrams on Pl. | ||||
XLI, No. 4. In the original these are placed after line 14.] That | ||||
part of a luminous body, of equal breadth and brilliancy throughout, | ||||
will look largest which is seen against the darkest background; and | ||||
the luminous body will seem on fire. | ||||
245. | ||||
WHY BODIES IN LIGHT AND SHADE HAVE THEIR OUTLINES ALTERED BY THE | ||||
COLOUR AND BRIGHTNESS OF THE OBJECTS SERVING AS A BACKGROUND TO | ||||
THEM. | ||||
If you look at a body of which the illuminated portion lies and ends | ||||
against a dark background, that part of the light which will look | ||||
brightest will be that which lies against the dark [background] at | ||||
_d_. But if this brighter part lies against a light background, the | ||||
edge of the object, which is itself light, will be less distinct | ||||
than before, and the highest light will appear to be between the | ||||
limit of the background _m f_ and the shadow. The same thing is seen | ||||
with regard to the dark [side], inasmuch as that edge of the shaded | ||||
portion of the object which lies against a light background, as at | ||||
_l_, it looks much darker than the rest. But if this shadow lies | ||||
against a dark background, the edge of the shaded part will appear | ||||
lighter than before, and the deepest shade will appear between the | ||||
edge and the light at the point _o_. | ||||
[Footnote: In the original diagram _o_ is inside the shaded surface | ||||
at the level of _d_.] | ||||
246. | ||||
An opaque body will appear smaller when it is surrounded by a highly | ||||
luminous background, and a light body will appear larger when it is | ||||
seen against a darker background. This may be seen in the height of | ||||
buildings at night, when lightning flashes behind them; it suddenly | ||||
seems, when it lightens, as though the height of the building were | ||||
diminished. For the same reason such buildings look larger in a | ||||
mist, or by night than when the atmosphere is clear and light. | ||||
247. | ||||
ON LIGHT BETWEEN SHADOWS | ||||
When you are drawing any object, remember, in comparing the grades | ||||
of light in the illuminated portions, that the eye is often deceived | ||||
by seeing things lighter than they are. And the reason lies in our | ||||
comparing those parts with the contiguous parts. Since if two | ||||
[separate] parts are in different grades of light and if the less | ||||
bright is conterminous with a dark portion and the brighter is | ||||
conterminous with a light background--as the sky or something | ||||
equally bright--, then that which is less light, or I should say | ||||
less radiant, will look the brighter and the brighter will seem the | ||||
darker. | ||||
248. | ||||
Of objects equally dark in themselves and situated at a considerable | ||||
and equal distance, that will look the darkest which is farthest | ||||
above the earth. | ||||
249. | ||||
TO PROVE HOW IT IS THAT LUMINOUS BODIES APPEAR LARGER, AT A | ||||
DISTANCE, THAN THEY ARE. | ||||
If you place two lighted candles side by side half a braccio apart, | ||||
and go from them to a distance 200 braccia you will see that by the | ||||
increased size of each they will appear as a single luminous body | ||||
with the light of the two flames, one braccio wide. | ||||
TO PROVE HOW YOU MAY SEE THE REAL SIZE OF LUMINOUS BODIES. | ||||
If you wish to see the real size of these luminous bodies, take a | ||||
very thin board and make in it a hole no bigger than the tag of a | ||||
lace and place it as close to your eye as possible, so that when you | ||||
look through this hole, at the said light, you can see a large space | ||||
of air round it. Then by rapidly moving this board backwards and | ||||
forwards before your eye you will see the light increase [and | ||||
diminish]. | ||||
Propositions on perspective of disappearance from MS. C. (250-262). | ||||
250. | ||||
Of several bodies of equal size and equally distant from the eye, | ||||
those will look the smallest which are against the lightest | ||||
background. | ||||
Every visible object must be surrounded by light and shade. A | ||||
perfectly spherical body surrounded by light and shade will appear | ||||
to have one side larger than the other in proportion as one is more | ||||
highly lighted than the other. | ||||
251. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
No visible object can be well understood and comprehended by the | ||||
human eye excepting from the difference of the background against | ||||
which the edges of the object terminate and by which they are | ||||
bounded, and no object will appear [to stand out] separate from that | ||||
background so far as the outlines of its borders are concerned. The | ||||
moon, though it is at a great distance from the sun, when, in an | ||||
eclipse, it comes between our eyes and the sun, appears to the eyes | ||||
of men to be close to the sun and affixed to it, because the sun is | ||||
then the background to the moon. | ||||
252. | ||||
A luminous body will appear more brilliant in proportion as it is | ||||
surrounded by deeper shadow. [Footnote: The diagram which, in the | ||||
original, is placed after this text, has no connection with it.] | ||||
253. | ||||
The straight edges of a body will appear broken when they are | ||||
conterminous with a dark space streaked with rays of light. | ||||
[Footnote: Here again the diagrams in the original have no | ||||
connection with the text.] | ||||
254. | ||||
Of several bodies, all equally large and equally distant, that which | ||||
is most brightly illuminated will appear to the eye nearest and | ||||
largest. [Footnote: Here again the diagrams in the original have no | ||||
connection with the text.] | ||||
255. | ||||
If several luminous bodies are seen from a great distance although | ||||
they are really separate they will appear united as one body. | ||||
256. | ||||
If several objects in shadow, standing very close together, are seen | ||||
against a bright background they will appear separated by wide | ||||
intervals. | ||||
257. | ||||
Of several bodies of equal size and tone, that which is farthest | ||||
will appear the lightest and smallest. | ||||
258. | ||||
Of several objects equal in size, brightness of background and | ||||
length that which has the flattest surface will look the largest. A | ||||
bar of iron equally thick throughout and of which half is red hot, | ||||
affords an example, for the red hot part looks thicker than the | ||||
rest. | ||||
259. | ||||
Of several bodies of equal size and length, and alike in form and in | ||||
depth of shade, that will appear smallest which is surrounded by the | ||||
most luminous background. | ||||
260. | ||||
DIFFERENT PORTIONS OF A WALL SURFACE WILL BE DARKER OR BRIGHTER IN | ||||
PROPORTION AS THE LIGHT OR SHADOW FALLS ON THEM AT A LARGER ANGLE. | ||||
The foregoing proposition can be clearly proved in this way. Let us | ||||
say that _m q_ is the luminous body, then _f g_ will be the opaque | ||||
body; and let _a e_ be the above-mentioned plane on which the said | ||||
angles fall, showing [plainly] the nature and character of their | ||||
bases. Then: _a_ will be more luminous than _b_; the base of the | ||||
angle _a_ is larger than that of _b_ and it therefore makes a | ||||
greater angle which will be _a m q_; and the pyramid _b p m_ will be | ||||
narrower and _m o c_ will be still finer, and so on by degrees, in | ||||
proportion as they are nearer to _e_, the pyramids will become | ||||
narrower and darker. That portion of the wall will be the darkest | ||||
where the breadth of the pyramid of shadow is greater than the | ||||
breadth of the pyramid of light. | ||||
At the point _a_ the pyramid of light is equal in strength to the | ||||
pyramid of shadow, because the base _f g_ is equal to the base _r | ||||
f_. At the point _d_ the pyramid of light is narrower than the | ||||
pyramid of shadow by so much as the base _s f_ is less than the base | ||||
_f g_. | ||||
Divide the foregoing proposition into two diagrams, one with the | ||||
pyramids of light and shadow, the other with the pyramids of light | ||||
[only]. | ||||
261. | ||||
Among shadows of equal depth those which are nearest to the eye will | ||||
look least deep. | ||||
262. | ||||
The more brilliant the light given by a luminous body, the deeper | ||||
will the shadows be cast by the objects it illuminates. | ||||
_V._ | ||||
_Theory of colours._ | ||||
_Leonardo's theory of colours is even more intimately connected with | ||||
his principles of light and shade than his Perspective of | ||||
Disappearance and is in fact merely an appendix or supplement to | ||||
those principles, as we gather from the titles to sections_ 264, | ||||
267_, and _276_, while others again_ (_Nos._ 281, 282_) are headed_ | ||||
Prospettiva. | ||||
_A very few of these chapters are to be found in the oldest copies | ||||
and editions of the Treatise on Painting, and although the material | ||||
they afford is but meager and the connection between them but | ||||
slight, we must still attribute to them a special theoretical value | ||||
as well as practical utility--all the more so because our knowledge | ||||
of the theory and use of colours at the time of the Renaissance is | ||||
still extremely limited._ | ||||
The reciprocal effects of colours on objects placed opposite each | ||||
other (263-272). | ||||
263. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
The hue of an illuminated object is affected by that of the luminous | ||||
body. | ||||
264. | ||||
OF SHADOW. | ||||
The surface of any opaque body is affected by the colour of | ||||
surrounding objects. | ||||
265. | ||||
A shadow is always affected by the colour of the surface on which it | ||||
is cast. | ||||
266. | ||||
An image produced in a mirror is affected by the colour of the | ||||
mirror. | ||||
267. | ||||
OF LIGHT AND SHADE. | ||||
Every portion of the surface of a body is varied [in hue] by the | ||||
[reflected] colour of the object that may be opposite to it. | ||||
EXAMPLE. | ||||
If you place a spherical body between various objects that is to say | ||||
with [direct] sunlight on one side of it, and on the other a wall | ||||
illuminated by the sun, which wall may be green or of any other | ||||
colour, while the surface on which it is placed may be red, and the | ||||
two lateral sides are in shadow, you will see that the natural | ||||
colour of that body will assume something of the hue reflected from | ||||
those objects. The strongest will be [given by] the luminous body; | ||||
the second by the illuminated wall, the third by the shadows. There | ||||
will still be a portion which will take a tint from the colour of | ||||
the edges. | ||||
268. | ||||
The surface of every opaque body is affected by the colour of the | ||||
objects surrounding it. But this effect will be strong or weak in | ||||
proportion as those objects are more or less remote and more or less | ||||
strongly [coloured]. | ||||
269. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
The surface of every opaque body assumes the hues reflected from | ||||
surrounding objects. | ||||
The surface of an opaque body assumes the hues of surrounding | ||||
objects more strongly in proportion as the rays that form the images | ||||
of those objects strike the surface at more equal angles. | ||||
And the surface of an opaque body assumes a stronger hue from the | ||||
surrounding objects in proportion as that surface is whiter and the | ||||
colour of the object brighter or more highly illuminated. | ||||
270. | ||||
OF THE RAYS WHICH CONVEY THROUGH THE AIR THE IMAGES OF OBJECTS. | ||||
All the minutest parts of the image intersect each other without | ||||
interfering with each other. To prove this let _r_ be one of the | ||||
sides of the hole, opposite to which let _s_ be the eye which sees | ||||
the lower end _o_ of the line _n o_. The other extremity cannot | ||||
transmit its image to the eye _s_ as it has to strike the end _r_ | ||||
and it is the same with regard to _m_ at the middle of the line. The | ||||
case is the same with the upper extremity _n_ and the eye _u_. And | ||||
if the end _n_ is red the eye _u_ on that side of the holes will not | ||||
see the green colour of _o_, but only the red of _n_ according to | ||||
the 7th of this where it is said: Every form projects images from | ||||
itself by the shortest line, which necessarily is a straight line, | ||||
&c. | ||||
[Footnote: 13. This probably refers to the diagram given under No. | ||||
66.] | ||||
271. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
The surface of a body assumes in some degree the hue of those around | ||||
it. The colours of illuminated objects are reflected from the | ||||
surfaces of one to the other in various spots, according to the | ||||
various positions of those objects. Let _o_ be a blue object in full | ||||
light, facing all by itself the space _b c_ on the white sphere _a b | ||||
e d e f_, and it will give it a blue tinge, _m_ is a yellow body | ||||
reflected onto the space _a b_ at the same time as _o_ the blue | ||||
body, and they give it a green colour (by the 2nd [proposition] of | ||||
this which shows that blue and yellow make a beautiful green &c.) | ||||
And the rest will be set forth in the Book on Painting. In that Book | ||||
it will be shown, that, by transmitting the images of objects and | ||||
the colours of bodies illuminated by sunlight through a small round | ||||
perforation and into a dark chamber onto a plane surface, which | ||||
itself is quite white, &c. | ||||
But every thing will be upside down. | ||||
Combination of different colours in cast shadows. | ||||
272. | ||||
That which casts the shadow does not face it, because the shadows | ||||
are produced by the light which causes and surrounds the shadows. | ||||
The shadow caused by the light _e_, which is yellow, has a blue | ||||
tinge, because the shadow of the body _a_ is cast upon the pavement | ||||
at _b_, where the blue light falls; and the shadow produced by the | ||||
light _d_, which is blue, will be yellow at _c_, because the yellow | ||||
light falls there and the surrounding background to these shadows _b | ||||
c_ will, besides its natural colour, assume a hue compounded of | ||||
yellow and blue, because it is lighted by the yellow light and by | ||||
the blue light both at once. | ||||
Shadows of various colours, as affected by the lights falling on | ||||
them. That light which causes the shadow does not face it. | ||||
[Footnote: In the original diagram we find in the circle _e_ | ||||
"_giallo_" (yellow) and the cirle _d_ "_azurro"_ (blue) and also | ||||
under the circle of shadow to the left "_giallo_" is written and | ||||
under that to the right "_azurro_". | ||||
In the second diagram where four circles are placed in a row we find | ||||
written, beginning at the left hand, "_giallo_" (yellow), "_azurro_" | ||||
(blue), "_verde_" (green), "_rosso_" (red).] | ||||
The effect of colours in the camera obscura (273-274). | ||||
273. | ||||
The edges of a colour(ed object) transmitted through a small hole | ||||
are more conspicuous than the central portions. | ||||
The edges of the images, of whatever colour, which are transmitted | ||||
through a small aperture into a dark chamber will always be stronger | ||||
than the middle portions. | ||||
274. | ||||
OF THE INTERSECTIONS OF THE IMAGES IN THE PUPIL OF THE EYE. | ||||
The intersections of the images as they enter the pupil do not | ||||
mingle in confusion in the space where that intersection unites | ||||
them; as is evident, since, if the rays of the sun pass through two | ||||
panes of glass in close contact, of which one is blue and the other | ||||
yellow, the rays, in penetrating them, do not become blue or yellow | ||||
but a beautiful green. And the same thing would happen in the eye, | ||||
if the images which were yellow or green should mingle where they | ||||
[meet and] intersect as they enter the pupil. As this does not | ||||
happen such a mingling does not exist. | ||||
OF THE NATURE OF THE RAYS COMPOSED OF THE IMAGES OF OBJECTS, AND OF | ||||
THEIR INTERSECTIONS. | ||||
The directness of the rays which transmit the forms and colours of | ||||
the bodies whence they proceed does not tinge the air nor can they | ||||
affect each other by contact where they intersect. They affect only | ||||
the spot where they vanish and cease to exist, because that spot | ||||
faces and is faced by the original source of these rays, and no | ||||
other object, which surrounds that original source can be seen by | ||||
the eye where these rays are cut off and destroyed, leaving there | ||||
the spoil they have conveyed to it. And this is proved by the 4th | ||||
[proposition], on the colour of bodies, which says: The surface of | ||||
every opaque body is affected by the colour of surrounding objects; | ||||
hence we may conclude that the spot which, by means of the rays | ||||
which convey the image, faces--and is faced by the cause of the | ||||
image, assumes the colour of that object. | ||||
On the colours of derived shadows (275. 276). | ||||
275. | ||||
ANY SHADOW CAST BY AN OPAQUE BODY SMALLER THAN THE LIGHT CAUSING THE | ||||
SHADOW WILL THROW A DERIVED SHADOW WHICH IS TINGED BY THE COLOUR OF | ||||
THE LIGHT. | ||||
Let _n_ be the source of the shadow _e f_; it will assume its hue. | ||||
Let _o_ be the source of _h e_ which will in the same way be tinged | ||||
by its hue and so also the colour of _v h_ will be affected by _p_ | ||||
which causes it; and the shadow of the triangle _z k y_ will be | ||||
affected by the colour of _q_, because it is produced by it. [7] In | ||||
proportion as _c d_ goes into _a d_, will _n r s_ be darker than | ||||
_m_; and the rest of the space will be shadowless [11]. _f g_ is | ||||
the highest light, because here the whole light of the window _a d_ | ||||
falls; and thus on the opaque body _m e_ is in equally high light; | ||||
_z k y_ is a triangle which includes the deepest shadow, because the | ||||
light _a d_ cannot reach any part of it. _x h_ is the 2nd grade of | ||||
shadow, because it receives only 1/3 of the light from the window, | ||||
that is _c d_. The third grade of shadow is _h e_, where two thirds | ||||
of the light from the window is visible. The last grade of shadow is | ||||
_b d e f_, because the highest grade of light from the window falls | ||||
at _f_. | ||||
[Footnote: The diagram Pl. III, No. 1 belongs to this chapter as | ||||
well as the text given in No. 148. Lines 7-11 (compare lines 8-12 of | ||||
No. 148) which are written within the diagram, evidently apply to | ||||
both sections and have therefore been inserted in both.] | ||||
276. | ||||
OF THE COLOURS OF SIMPLE DERIVED SHADOWS. | ||||
The colour of derived shadows is always affected by that of the body | ||||
towards which they are cast. To prove this: let an opaque body be | ||||
placed between the plane _s c t d_ and the blue light _d e_ and the | ||||
red light _a b_, then I say that _d e_, the blue light, will fall on | ||||
the whole surface _s c t d_ excepting at _o p_ which is covered by | ||||
the shadow of the body _q r_, as is shown by the straight lines _d q | ||||
o e r p_. And the same occurs with the light _a b_ which falls on | ||||
the whole surface _s c t d_ excepting at the spot obscured by the | ||||
shadow _q r_; as is shown by the lines _d q o_, and _e r p_. Hence | ||||
we may conclude that the shadow _n m_ is exposed to the blue light | ||||
_d e_; but, as the red light _a b_ cannot fall there, _n m_ will | ||||
appear as a blue shadow on a red background tinted with blue, | ||||
because on the surface _s c t d_ both lights can fall. But in the | ||||
shadows only one single light falls; for this reason these shadows | ||||
are of medium depth, since, if no light whatever mingled with the | ||||
shadow, it would be of the first degree of darkness &c. But in the | ||||
shadow at _o p_ the blue light does not fall, because the body _q r_ | ||||
interposes and intercepts it there. Only the red light _a b_ falls | ||||
there and tinges the shadow of a red hue and so a ruddy shadow | ||||
appears on the background of mingled red and blue. | ||||
The shadow of _q r_ at _o p_ is red, being caused by the blue light | ||||
_d e_; and the shadow of _q r_ at _o' p'_ is blue being caused by | ||||
the red light _a b_. Hence we say that the blue light in this | ||||
instance causes a red derived shadow from the opaque body _q' r'_, | ||||
while the red light causes the same body to cast a blue derived | ||||
shadow; but the primary shadow [on the dark side of the body itself] | ||||
is not of either of those hues, but a mixture of red and blue. | ||||
The derived shadows will be equal in depth if they are produced by | ||||
lights of equal strength and at an equal distance; this is proved. | ||||
[Footnote 53: The text is unfinished in the original.] | ||||
[Footnote: In the original diagram Leonardo has written within the | ||||
circle _q r corpo obroso_ (body in shadow); at the spot marked _A, | ||||
luminoso azzurro_ (blue luminous body); at _B, luminoso rosso_ (red | ||||
luminous body). At _E_ we read _ombra azzurra_ (blue tinted shadow) | ||||
and at _D ombra rossa_ (red tinted shadow).] | ||||
On the nature of colours (277. 278). | ||||
277. | ||||
No white or black is transparent. | ||||
278. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
[Footnote 2: See Footnote 3] Since white is not a colour but the | ||||
neutral recipient of every colour [Footnote 3: _il bianco non e | ||||
colore ma e inpotentia ricettiva d'ogni colore_ (white is not a | ||||
colour, but the neutral recipient of every colour). LEON BATT. | ||||
ALBERTI "_Della pittura_" libro I, asserts on the contrary: "_Il | ||||
bianco e'l nero non sono veri colori, ma sono alteratione delli | ||||
altri colori_" (ed. JANITSCHEK, p. 67; Vienna 1877).], when it is | ||||
seen in the open air and high up, all its shadows are bluish; and | ||||
this is caused, according to the 4th [prop.], which says: the | ||||
surface of every opaque body assumes the hue of the surrounding | ||||
objects. Now this white [body] being deprived of the light of the | ||||
sun by the interposition of some body between the sun and itself, | ||||
all that portion of it which is exposed to the sun and atmosphere | ||||
assumes the colour of the sun and atmosphere; the side on which the | ||||
sun does not fall remains in shadow and assumes the hue of the | ||||
atmosphere. And if this white object did not reflect the green of | ||||
the fields all the way to the horizon nor get the brightness of the | ||||
horizon itself, it would certainly appear simply of the same hue as | ||||
the atmosphere. | ||||
On gradations in the depth of colours (279. 280). | ||||
279. | ||||
Since black, when painted next to white, looks no blacker than when | ||||
next to black; and white when next to black looks no whiter than | ||||
white, as is seen by the images transmitted through a small hole or | ||||
by the edges of any opaque screen ... | ||||
280. | ||||
OF COLOURS. | ||||
Of several colours, all equally white, that will look whitest which | ||||
is against the darkest background. And black will look intensest | ||||
against the whitest background. | ||||
And red will look most vivid against the yellowest background; and | ||||
the same is the case with all colours when surrounded by their | ||||
strongest contrasts. | ||||
On the reflection of colours (281-283). | ||||
281. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
Every object devoid of colour in itself is more or less tinged by | ||||
the colour [of the object] placed opposite. This may be seen by | ||||
experience, inasmuch as any object which mirrors another assumes the | ||||
colour of the object mirrored in it. And if the surface thus | ||||
partially coloured is white the portion which has a red reflection | ||||
will appear red, or any other colour, whether bright or dark. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
Every opaque and colourless body assumes the hue of the colour | ||||
reflected on it; as happens with a white wall. | ||||
282. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
That side of an object in light and shade which is towards the light | ||||
transmits the images of its details more distinctly and immediately | ||||
to the eye than the side which is in shadow. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
The solar rays reflected on a square mirror will be thrown back to | ||||
distant objects in a circular form. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
Any white and opaque surface will be partially coloured by | ||||
reflections from surrounding objects. | ||||
[Footnote 281. 282: The title line of these chapters is in the | ||||
original simply _"pro"_, which may be an abbreviation for either | ||||
_Propositione_ or _Prospettiva_--taking Prospettiva of course in its | ||||
widest sense, as we often find it used in Leonardo's writings. The | ||||
title _"pro"_ has here been understood to mean _Prospettiva_, in | ||||
accordance with the suggestion afforded by page 10b of this same | ||||
MS., where the first section is headed _Prospettiva_ in full (see | ||||
No. 94), while the four following sections are headed merely _"pro"_ | ||||
(see No. 85).] | ||||
283. | ||||
WHAT PORTION OF A COLOURED SURFACE OUGHT IN REASON TO BE THE MOST | ||||
INTENSE. | ||||
If _a_ is the light, and _b_ illuminated by it in a direct line, | ||||
_c_, on which the light cannot fall, is lighted only by reflection | ||||
from _b_ which, let us say, is red. Hence the light reflected from | ||||
it, will be affected by the hue of the surface causing it and will | ||||
tinge the surface _c_ with red. And if _c_ is also red you will see | ||||
it much more intense than _b_; and if it were yellow you would see | ||||
there a colour between yellow and red. | ||||
On the use of dark and light colours in painting (284--286). | ||||
284. | ||||
WHY BEAUTIFUL COLOURS MUST BE IN THE [HIGHEST] LIGHT. | ||||
Since we see that the quality of colour is known [only] by means of | ||||
light, it is to be supposed that where there is most light the true | ||||
character of a colour in light will be best seen; and where there is | ||||
most shadow the colour will be affected by the tone of that. Hence, | ||||
O Painter! remember to show the true quality of colours in bright | ||||
lights. | ||||
285. | ||||
An object represented in white and black will display stronger | ||||
relief than in any other way; hence I would remind you O Painter! to | ||||
dress your figures in the lightest colours you can, since, if you | ||||
put them in dark colours, they will be in too slight relief and | ||||
inconspicuous from a distance. And the reason is that the shadows of | ||||
all objects are dark. And if you make a dress dark there is little | ||||
variety in the lights and shadows, while in light colours there are | ||||
many grades. | ||||
286. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
Colours seen in shadow will display more or less of their natural | ||||
brilliancy in proportion as they are in fainter or deeper shadow. | ||||
But if these same colours are situated in a well-lighted place, they | ||||
will appear brighter in proportion as the light is more brilliant. | ||||
THE ADVERSARY. | ||||
The variety of colours in shadow must be as great as that of the | ||||
colours in the objects in that shadow. | ||||
THE ANSWER. | ||||
Colours seen in shadow will display less variety in proportion as | ||||
the shadows in which they lie are deeper. And evidence of this is to | ||||
be had by looking from an open space into the doorways of dark and | ||||
shadowy churches, where the pictures which are painted in various | ||||
colours all look of uniform darkness. | ||||
Hence at a considerable distance all the shadows of different | ||||
colours will appear of the same darkness. | ||||
It is the light side of an object in light and shade which shows the | ||||
true colour. | ||||
On the colours of the rainbow (287. 288). | ||||
287. | ||||
Treat of the rainbow in the last book on Painting, but first write | ||||
the book on colours produced by the mixture of other colours, so as | ||||
to be able to prove by those painters' colours how the colours of | ||||
the rainbow are produced. | ||||
288. | ||||
WHETHER THE COLOURS OF THE RAINBOW ARE PRODUCED BY THE SUN. | ||||
The colours of the rainbow are not produced by the sun, for they | ||||
occur in many ways without the sunshine; as may be seen by holding a | ||||
glass of water up to the eye; when, in the glass--where there are | ||||
those minute bubbles always seen in coarse glass--each bubble, even | ||||
though the sun does not fall on it, will produce on one side all the | ||||
colours of the rainbow; as you may see by placing the glass between | ||||
the day light and your eye in such a way as that it is close to the | ||||
eye, while on one side the glass admits the [diffused] light of the | ||||
atmosphere, and on the other side the shadow of the wall on one side | ||||
of the window; either left or right, it matters not which. Then, by | ||||
turning the glass round you will see these colours all round the | ||||
bubbles in the glass &c. And the rest shall be said in its place. | ||||
THAT THE EYE HAS NO PART IN PRODUCING THE COLOURS OF THE RAINBOW. | ||||
In the experiment just described, the eye would seem to have some | ||||
share in the colours of the rainbow, since these bubbles in the | ||||
glass do not display the colours except through the medium of the | ||||
eye. But, if you place the glass full of water on the window sill, | ||||
in such a position as that the outer side is exposed to the sun's | ||||
rays, you will see the same colours produced in the spot of light | ||||
thrown through the glass and upon the floor, in a dark place, below | ||||
the window; and as the eye is not here concerned in it, we may | ||||
evidently, and with certainty pronounce that the eye has no share in | ||||
producing them. | ||||
OF THE COLOURS IN THE FEATHERS OF CERTAIN BIRDS. | ||||
There are many birds in various regions of the world on whose | ||||
feathers we see the most splendid colours produced as they move, as | ||||
we see in our own country in the feathers of peacocks or on the | ||||
necks of ducks or pigeons, &c. | ||||
Again, on the surface of antique glass found underground and on the | ||||
roots of turnips kept for some time at the bottom of wells or other | ||||
stagnant waters [we see] that each root displays colours similar to | ||||
those of the real rainbow. They may also be seen when oil has been | ||||
placed on the top of water and in the solar rays reflected from the | ||||
surface of a diamond or beryl; again, through the angular facet of a | ||||
beryl every dark object against a background of the atmosphere or | ||||
any thing else equally pale-coloured is surrounded by these rainbow | ||||
colours between the atmosphere and the dark body; and in many other | ||||
circumstances which I will not mention, as these suffice for my | ||||
purpose. | ||||
_VI._ | ||||
_'Prospettiva de' colri' (Perspective of Colour)_ | ||||
_and_ | ||||
_'Prospettiva aerea' (Aerial Perspective)._ | ||||
_Leonardo distinctly separates these branches of his subject, as may | ||||
be seen in the beginning of No._ 295. _Attempts have been made to | ||||
cast doubts on the results which Leonardo arrived at by experiment | ||||
on the perspective of colour, but not with justice, as may be seen | ||||
from the original text of section_ 294. | ||||
_The question as to the composition of the atmosphere, which is | ||||
inseparable from a discussion on Aerial Perspective, forms a | ||||
separate theory which is treated at considerable length. Indeed the | ||||
author enters into it so fully that we cannot escape the conviction | ||||
that he must have dwelt with particular pleasure on this part of his | ||||
subject, and that he attached great importance to giving it a | ||||
character of general applicability._ | ||||
General rules (289--291). | ||||
289. | ||||
The variety of colour in objects cannot be discerned at a great | ||||
distance, excepting in those parts which are directly lighted up by | ||||
the solar rays. | ||||
290. | ||||
As to the colours of objects: at long distances no difference is | ||||
perceptible in the parts in shadow. | ||||
291. | ||||
OF THE VISIBILITY OF COLOURS. | ||||
Which colour strikes most? An object at a distance is most | ||||
conspicuous, when it is lightest, and the darkest is least visible. | ||||
An exceptional case. | ||||
292. | ||||
Of the edges [outlines] of shadows. Some have misty and ill defined | ||||
edges, others distinct ones. | ||||
No opaque body can be devoid of light and shade, except it is in a | ||||
mist, on ground covered with snow, or when snow is falling on the | ||||
open country which has no light on it and is surrounded with | ||||
darkness. | ||||
And this occurs [only] in spherical bodies, because in other bodies | ||||
which have limbs and parts, those sides of limbs which face each | ||||
other reflect on each other the accidental [hue and tone] of their | ||||
surface. | ||||
An experiment. | ||||
293. | ||||
ALL COLOURS ARE AT A DISTANCE UNDISTINGUISHABLE AND UNDISCERNIBLE. | ||||
All colours at a distance are undistinguishable in shadow, because | ||||
an object which is not in the highest light is incapable of | ||||
transmitting its image to the eye through an atmosphere more | ||||
luminous than itself; since the lesser brightness must be absorbed | ||||
by the greater. For instance: We, in a house, can see that all the | ||||
colours on the surface of the walls are clearly and instantly | ||||
visible when the windows of the house are open; but if we were to go | ||||
out of the house and look in at the windows from a little distance | ||||
to see the paintings on those walls, instead of the paintings we | ||||
should see an uniform deep and colourless shadow. | ||||
The practice of the prospettiva de colori. | ||||
294. | ||||
HOW A PAINTER SHOULD CARRY OUT THE PERSPECTIVE OF COLOUR IN | ||||
PRACTICE. | ||||
In order to put into practice this perspective of the variation and | ||||
loss or diminution of the essential character of colours, observe at | ||||
every hundred braccia some objects standing in the landscape, such | ||||
as trees, houses, men and particular places. Then in front of the | ||||
first tree have a very steady plate of glass and keep your eye very | ||||
steady, and then, on this plate of glass, draw a tree, tracing it | ||||
over the form of that tree. Then move it on one side so far as that | ||||
the real tree is close by the side of the tree you have drawn; then | ||||
colour your drawing in such a way as that in colour and form the two | ||||
may be alike, and that both, if you close one eye, seem to be | ||||
painted on the glass and at the same distance. Then, by the same | ||||
method, represent a second tree, and a third, with a distance of a | ||||
hundred braccia between each. And these will serve as a standard and | ||||
guide whenever you work on your own pictures, wherever they may | ||||
apply, and will enable you to give due distance in those works. [14] | ||||
But I have found that as a rule the second is 4/5 of the first when | ||||
it is 20 braccia beyond it. | ||||
[Footnote: This chapter is one of those copied in the Manuscript of | ||||
the Vatican library Urbinas 1270, and the original text is rendered | ||||
here with no other alterations, but in the orthography. H. LUDWIG, | ||||
in his edition of this copy translates lines 14 and 15 thus: "_Ich | ||||
finde aber als Regel, dass der zweite um vier Funftel des ersten | ||||
abnimmt, wenn er namlich zwanzig Ellen vom ersten entfernt ist | ||||
(?)"_. He adds in his commentary: "_Das Ende der Nummer ist wohl | ||||
jedenfalls verstummelt_". However the translation given above shows | ||||
that it admits of a different rendering.] | ||||
The rules of aerial perspective (295--297). | ||||
295. | ||||
OF AERIAL PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
There is another kind of perspective which I call Aerial | ||||
Perspective, because by the atmosphere we are able to distinguish | ||||
the variations in distance of different buildings, which appear | ||||
placed on a single line; as, for instance, when we see several | ||||
buildings beyond a wall, all of which, as they appear above the top | ||||
of the wall, look of the same size, while you wish to represent them | ||||
in a picture as more remote one than another and to give the effect | ||||
of a somewhat dense atmosphere. You know that in an atmosphere of | ||||
equal density the remotest objects seen through it, as mountains, in | ||||
consequence of the great quantity of atmosphere between your eye and | ||||
them--appear blue and almost of the same hue as the atmosphere | ||||
itself [Footnote 10: _quado il sole e per leuante_ (when the sun is | ||||
in the East). Apparently the author refers here to morning light in | ||||
general. H. LUDWIG however translates this passage from the Vatican | ||||
copy "_wenn namlich die Sonne (dahinter) im Osten steht_".] when the | ||||
sun is in the East [Footnote 11: See Footnote 10]. Hence you must | ||||
make the nearest building above the wall of its real colour, but the | ||||
more distant ones make less defined and bluer. Those you wish should | ||||
look farthest away you must make proportionately bluer; thus, if one | ||||
is to be five times as distant, make it five times bluer. And by | ||||
this rule the buildings which above a [given] line appear of the | ||||
same size, will plainly be distinguished as to which are the more | ||||
remote and which larger than the others. | ||||
296. | ||||
The medium lying between the eye and the object seen, tinges that | ||||
object with its colour, as the blueness of the atmosphere makes the | ||||
distant mountains appear blue and red glass makes objects seen | ||||
beyond it, look red. The light shed round them by the stars is | ||||
obscured by the darkness of the night which lies between the eye and | ||||
the radiant light of the stars. | ||||
297. | ||||
Take care that the perspective of colour does not disagree with the | ||||
size of your objects, hat is to say: that the colours diminish from | ||||
their natural [vividness] in proportion as the objects at various | ||||
distances dimmish from their natural size. | ||||
On the relative density of the atmosphere (298--290). | ||||
298. | ||||
WHY THE ATMOSPHERE MUST BE REPRESENTED AS PALER TOWARDS THE LOWER | ||||
PORTION. | ||||
Because the atmosphere is dense near the earth, and the higher it is | ||||
the rarer it becomes. When the sun is in the East if you look | ||||
towards the West and a little way to the South and North, you will | ||||
see that this dense atmosphere receives more light from the sun than | ||||
the rarer; because the rays meet with greater resistance. And if the | ||||
sky, as you see it, ends on a low plain, that lowest portion of the | ||||
sky will be seen through a denser and whiter atmosphere, which will | ||||
weaken its true colour as seen through that medium, and there the | ||||
sky will look whiter than it is above you, where the line of sight | ||||
travels through a smaller space of air charged with heavy vapour. | ||||
And if you turn to the East, the atmosphere will appear darker as | ||||
you look lower down because the luminous rays pass less freely | ||||
through the lower atmosphere. | ||||
299. | ||||
OF THE MODE OF TREATING REMOTE OBJECTS IN PAINTING. | ||||
It is easy to perceive that the atmosphere which lies closest to the | ||||
level ground is denser than the rest, and that where it is higher | ||||
up, it is rarer and more transparent. The lower portions of large | ||||
and lofty objects which are at a distance are not much seen, because | ||||
you see them along a line which passes through a denser and thicker | ||||
section of the atmosphere. The summits of such heights are seen | ||||
along a line which, though it starts from your eye in a dense | ||||
atmosphere, still, as it ends at the top of those lofty objects, | ||||
ceases in a much rarer atmosphere than exists at their base; for | ||||
this reason the farther this line extends from your eye, from point | ||||
to point the atmosphere becomes more and more rare. Hence, O | ||||
Painter! when you represent mountains, see that from hill to hill | ||||
the bases are paler than the summits, and in proportion as they | ||||
recede beyond each other make the bases paler than the summits; | ||||
while, the higher they are the more you must show of their true form | ||||
and colour. | ||||
On the colour of the atmosphere (300-307). | ||||
300. | ||||
OF THE COLOUR OF THE ATMOSPHERE. | ||||
I say that the blueness we see in the atmosphere is not intrinsic | ||||
colour, but is caused by warm vapour evaporated in minute and | ||||
insensible atoms on which the solar rays fall, rendering them | ||||
luminous against the infinite darkness of the fiery sphere which | ||||
lies beyond and includes it. And this may be seen, as I saw it by | ||||
any one going up [Footnote 5: With regard to the place spoken of as | ||||
_M'oboso_ (compare No. 301 line 20) its identity will be discussed | ||||
under Leonardo's Topographical notes in Vol. II.] Monboso, a peak of | ||||
the Alps which divide France from Italy. The base of this mountain | ||||
gives birth to the four rivers which flow in four different | ||||
directions through the whole of Europe. And no mountain has its base | ||||
at so great a height as this, which lifts itself almost above the | ||||
clouds; and snow seldom falls there, but only hail in the summer, | ||||
when the clouds are highest. And this hail lies [unmelted] there, so | ||||
that if it were not for the absorption of the rising and falling | ||||
clouds, which does not happen twice in an age, an enormous mass of | ||||
ice would be piled up there by the hail, and in the middle of July I | ||||
found it very considerable. There I saw above me the dark sky, and | ||||
the sun as it fell on the mountain was far brighter here than in the | ||||
plains below, because a smaller extent of atmosphere lay between the | ||||
summit of the mountain and the sun. Again as an illustration of the | ||||
colour of the atmosphere I will mention the smoke of old and dry | ||||
wood, which, as it comes out of a chimney, appears to turn very | ||||
blue, when seen between the eye and the dark distance. But as it | ||||
rises, and comes between the eye and the bright atmosphere, it at | ||||
once shows of an ashy grey colour; and this happens because it no | ||||
longer has darkness beyond it, but this bright and luminous space. | ||||
If the smoke is from young, green wood, it will not appear blue, | ||||
because, not being transparent and being full of superabundant | ||||
moisture, it has the effect of condensed clouds which take distinct | ||||
lights and shadows like a solid body. The same occurs with the | ||||
atmosphere, which, when overcharged with moisture appears white, and | ||||
the small amount of heated moisture makes it dark, of a dark blue | ||||
colour; and this will suffice us so far as concerns the colour of | ||||
the atmosphere; though it might be added that, if this transparent | ||||
blue were the natural colour of the atmosphere, it would follow that | ||||
wherever a larger mass air intervened between the eye and the | ||||
element of fire, the azure colour would be more intense; as we see | ||||
in blue glass and in sapphires, which are darker in proportion as | ||||
they are larger. But the atmosphere in such circumstances behaves in | ||||
an opposite manner, inasmuch as where a greater quantity of it lies | ||||
between the eye and the sphere of fire, it is seen much whiter. This | ||||
occurs towards the horizon. And the less the extent of atmosphere | ||||
between the eye and the sphere of fire, the deeper is the blue | ||||
colour, as may be seen even on low plains. Hence it follows, as I | ||||
say, that the atmosphere assumes this azure hue by reason of the | ||||
particles of moisture which catch the rays of the sun. Again, we may | ||||
note the difference in particles of dust, or particles of smoke, in | ||||
the sun beams admitted through holes into a dark chamber, when the | ||||
former will look ash grey and the thin smoke will appear of a most | ||||
beautiful blue; and it may be seen again in in the dark shadows of | ||||
distant mountains when the air between the eye and those shadows | ||||
will look very blue, though the brightest parts of those mountains | ||||
will not differ much from their true colour. But if any one wishes | ||||
for a final proof let him paint a board with various colours, among | ||||
them an intense black; and over all let him lay a very thin and | ||||
transparent [coating of] white. He will then see that this | ||||
transparent white will nowhere show a more beautiful blue than over | ||||
the black--but it must be very thin and finely ground. | ||||
[Footnote 7: _reta_ here has the sense of _malanno_.] | ||||
301. | ||||
Experience shows us that the air must have darkness beyond it and | ||||
yet it appears blue. If you produce a small quantity of smoke from | ||||
dry wood and the rays of the sun fall on this smoke, and if you then | ||||
place behind the smoke a piece of black velvet on which the sun does | ||||
not shine, you will see that all the smoke which is between the eye | ||||
and the black stuff will appear of a beautiful blue colour. And if | ||||
instead of the velvet you place a white cloth smoke, that is too | ||||
thick smoke, hinders, and too thin smoke does not produce, the | ||||
perfection of this blue colour. Hence a moderate amount of smoke | ||||
produces the finest blue. Water violently ejected in a fine spray | ||||
and in a dark chamber where the sun beams are admitted produces | ||||
these blue rays and the more vividly if it is distilled water, and | ||||
thin smoke looks blue. This I mention in order to show that the | ||||
blueness of the atmosphere is caused by the darkness beyond it, and | ||||
these instances are given for those who cannot confirm my experience | ||||
on Monboso. | ||||
302. | ||||
When the smoke from dry wood is seen between the eye of the | ||||
spectator and some dark space [or object], it will look blue. Thus | ||||
the sky looks blue by reason of the darkness beyond it. And if you | ||||
look towards the horizon of the sky, you will see the atmosphere is | ||||
not blue, and this is caused by its density. And thus at each | ||||
degree, as you raise your eyes above the horizon up to the sky over | ||||
your head, you will see the atmosphere look darker [blue] and this | ||||
is because a smaller density of air lies between your eye and the | ||||
[outer] darkness. And if you go to the top of a high mountain the | ||||
sky will look proportionately darker above you as the atmosphere | ||||
becomes rarer between you and the [outer] darkness; and this will be | ||||
more visible at each degree of increasing height till at last we | ||||
should find darkness. | ||||
That smoke will look bluest which rises from the driest wood and | ||||
which is nearest to the fire and is seen against the darkest | ||||
background, and with the sunlight upon it. | ||||
303. | ||||
A dark object will appear bluest in proportion as it has a greater | ||||
mass of luminous atmosphere between it and the eye. As may be seen | ||||
in the colour of the sky. | ||||
304. | ||||
The atmosphere is blue by reason of the darkness above it because | ||||
black and white make blue. | ||||
305. | ||||
In the morning the mist is denser above than below, because the sun | ||||
draws it upwards; hence tall buildings, even if the summit is at the | ||||
same distance as the base have the summit invisible. Therefore, | ||||
also, the sky looks darkest [in colour] overhead, and towards the | ||||
horizon it is not blue but rather between smoke and dust colour. | ||||
The atmosphere, when full of mist, is quite devoid of blueness, and | ||||
only appears of the colour of clouds, which shine white when the | ||||
weather is fine. And the more you turn to the west the darker it | ||||
will be, and the brighter as you look to the east. And the verdure | ||||
of the fields is bluish in a thin mist, but grows grey in a dense | ||||
one. | ||||
The buildings in the west will only show their illuminated side, | ||||
where the sun shines, and the mist hides the rest. When the sun | ||||
rises and chases away the haze, the hills on the side where it lifts | ||||
begin to grow clearer, and look blue, and seem to smoke with the | ||||
vanishing mists; and the buildings reveal their lights and shadows; | ||||
through the thinner vapour they show only their lights and through | ||||
the thicker air nothing at all. This is when the movement of the | ||||
mist makes it part horizontally, and then the edges of the mist will | ||||
be indistinct against the blue of the sky, and towards the earth it | ||||
will look almost like dust blown up. In proportion as the atmosphere | ||||
is dense the buildings of a city and the trees in a landscape will | ||||
look fewer, because only the tallest and largest will be seen. | ||||
Darkness affects every thing with its hue, and the more an object | ||||
differs from darkness, the more we see its real and natural colour. | ||||
The mountains will look few, because only those will be seen which | ||||
are farthest apart; since, at such a distance, the density increases | ||||
to such a degree that it causes a brightness by which the darkness | ||||
of the hills becomes divided and vanishes indeed towards the top. | ||||
There is less [mist] between lower and nearer hills and yet little | ||||
is to be distinguished, and least towards the bottom. | ||||
306. | ||||
The surface of an object partakes of the colour of the light which | ||||
illuminates it; and of the colour of the atmosphere which lies | ||||
between the eye and that object, that is of the colour of the | ||||
transparent medium lying between the object and the eye; and among | ||||
colours of a similar character the second will be of the same tone | ||||
as the first, and this is caused by the increased thickness of the | ||||
colour of the medium lying between the object and the eye. | ||||
307. OF PAINTING. | ||||
Of various colours which are none of them blue that which at a great | ||||
distance will look bluest is the nearest to black; and so, | ||||
conversely, the colour which is least like black will at a great | ||||
distance best preserve its own colour. | ||||
Hence the green of fields will assume a bluer hue than yellow or | ||||
white will, and conversely yellow or white will change less than | ||||
green, and red still less. | ||||
_VII._ | ||||
_On the Proportions and on the Movements of the Human Figure._ | ||||
_Leonardo's researches on the proportions and movements of the human | ||||
figure must have been for the most part completed and written before | ||||
the year_ 1498; _for LUCA PACIOLO writes, in the dedication to | ||||
Ludovico il Moro, of his book_ Divina Proportione, _which was | ||||
published in that year:_ "Leonardo da venci ... hauedo gia co tutta | ||||
diligetia al degno libro de pictura e movimenti humani posto fine". | ||||
_The selection of Leonardo's axioms contained in the Vatican copy | ||||
attributes these words to the author:_ "e il resto si dira nella | ||||
universale misura del huomo". (_MANZI, p. 147; LUDWIG, No. 264_). | ||||
_LOMAZZO, again, in his_ Idea del Tempio della Pittura Milano 1590, | ||||
cap. IV, _says:_ "Lionardo Vinci ... dimostro anco in figura tutte | ||||
le proporzioni dei membri del corpo umano". | ||||
_The Vatican copy includes but very few sections of the_ "Universale | ||||
misura del huomo" _and until now nothing has been made known of the | ||||
original MSS. on the subject which have supplied the very extensive | ||||
materials for this portion of the work. The collection at Windsor, | ||||
belonging to her Majesty the Queen, includes by far the most | ||||
important part of Leonardo's investigations on this subject, | ||||
constituting about half of the whole of the materials here | ||||
published; and the large number of original drawings adds greatly to | ||||
the interest which the subject itself must command. Luca Paciolo | ||||
would seem to have had these MSS. (which I have distinguished by the | ||||
initials W. P.) in his mind when he wrote the passage quoted above. | ||||
Still, certain notes of a later date--such as Nos. 360, 362 and 363, | ||||
from MS. E, written in 1513--14, sufficiently prove that Leonardo did | ||||
not consider his earlier studies on the Proportions and Movements of | ||||
the Human Figure final and complete, as we might suppose from Luca | ||||
Paciolo's statement. Or else he took the subject up again at a | ||||
subsequent period, since his former researches had been carried on | ||||
at Milan between 1490 and 1500. Indeed it is highly probable that | ||||
the anatomical studies which he was pursuing zvith so much zeal | ||||
between 1510--16 should have led him to reconsider the subject of | ||||
Proportion. | ||||
Preliminary observations (308. 309). | ||||
308. | ||||
Every man, at three years old is half the full height he will grow | ||||
to at last. | ||||
309. | ||||
If a man 2 braccia high is too small, one of four is too tall, the | ||||
medium being what is admirable. Between 2 and 4 comes 3; therefore | ||||
take a man of 3 braccia in height and measure him by the rule I will | ||||
give you. If you tell me that I may be mistaken, and judge a man to | ||||
be well proportioned who does not conform to this division, I answer | ||||
that you must look at many men of 3 braccia, and out of the larger | ||||
number who are alike in their limbs choose one of those who are most | ||||
graceful and take your measurements. The length of the hand is 1/3 | ||||
of a braccio [8 inches] and this is found 9 times in man. And the | ||||
face [Footnote 7: The account here given of the _braccio_ is of | ||||
importance in understanding some of the succeeding chapters. _Testa_ | ||||
must here be understood to mean the face. The statements in this | ||||
section are illustrated in part on Pl. XI.] is the same, and from | ||||
the pit of the throat to the shoulder, and from the shoulder to the | ||||
nipple, and from one nipple to the other, and from each nipple to | ||||
the pit of the throat. | ||||
Proportions of the head and face (310-318). | ||||
310. | ||||
The space between the parting of the lips [the mouth] and the base | ||||
of the nose is one-seventh of the face. | ||||
The space from the mouth to the bottom of the chin _c d_ is the | ||||
fourth part of the face and equal to the width of the mouth. | ||||
The space from the chin to the base of the nose _e f_ is the third | ||||
part of the face and equal to the length of the nose and to the | ||||
forehead. | ||||
The distance from the middle of the nose to the bottom of the chin | ||||
_g h_, is half the length of the face. | ||||
The distance from the top of the nose, where the eyebrows begin, to | ||||
the bottom of the chin, _i k_, is two thirds of the face. | ||||
The space from the parting of the lips to the top of the chin _l m_, | ||||
that is where the chin ends and passes into the lower lip of the | ||||
mouth, is the third of the distance from the parting of the lips to | ||||
the bottom of the chin and is the twelfth part of the face. From the | ||||
top to the bottom of the chin _m n_ is the sixth part of the face | ||||
and is the fifty fourth part of a man's height. | ||||
From the farthest projection of the chin to the throat _o p_ is | ||||
equal to the space between the mouth and the bottom of the chin, and | ||||
a fourth of the face. | ||||
The distance from the top of the throat to the pit of the throat | ||||
below _q r_ is half the length of the face and the eighteenth part | ||||
of a man's height. | ||||
From the chin to the back of the neck _s t_, is the same distance as | ||||
between the mouth and the roots of the hair, that is three quarters | ||||
of the head. | ||||
From the chin to the jaw bone _v x_ is half the head and equal to | ||||
the thickness of the neck in profile. | ||||
The thickness of the head from the brow to the nape is once and 3/4 | ||||
that of the neck. | ||||
[Footnote: The drawings to this text, lines 1-10 are on Pl. VII, No. | ||||
I. The two upper sketches of heads, Pl. VII, No. 2, belong to lines | ||||
11-14, and in the original are placed immediately below the sketches | ||||
reproduced on Pl. VII, No. 1.] | ||||
311. | ||||
The distance from the attachment of one ear to the other is equal to | ||||
that from the meeting of the eyebrows to the chin, and in a fine | ||||
face the width of the mouth is equal to the length from the parting | ||||
of the lips to the bottom of the chin. | ||||
312. | ||||
The cut or depression below the lower lip of the mouth is half way | ||||
between the bottom of the nose and the bottom of the chin. | ||||
The face forms a square in itself; that is its width is from the | ||||
outer corner of one eye to the other, and its height is from the | ||||
very top of the nose to the bottom of the lower lip of the mouth; | ||||
then what remains above and below this square amounts to the height | ||||
of such another square, _a_ _b_ is equal to the space between _c_ | ||||
_d_; _d_ _n_ in the same way to _n_ _c_, and likewise _s_ _r_, _q_ | ||||
_p_, _h_ _k_ are equal to each other. | ||||
It is as far between _m_ and _s_ as from the bottom of the nose to | ||||
the chin. The ear is exactly as long as the nose. It is as far from | ||||
_x_ to _j_ as from the nose to the chin. The parting of the mouth | ||||
seen in profile slopes to the angle of the jaw. The ear should be as | ||||
high as from the bottom of the nose to the top of the eye-lid. The | ||||
space between the eyes is equal to the width of an eye. The ear is | ||||
over the middle of the neck, when seen in profile. The distance from | ||||
4 to 5 is equal to that from s_ to _r_. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. VIII, No. I, where the text of lines 3-13 is also | ||||
given in facsimile.] | ||||
313. | ||||
(_a_ _b_) is equal to (_c_ _d_). | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. VII, No. 3. Reference may also be made here to | ||||
two pen and ink drawings of heads in profile with figured | ||||
measurements, of which there is no description in the MS. These are | ||||
given on Pl. XVII, No. 2.--A head, to the left, with part of the | ||||
torso [W. P. 5a], No. 1 on the same plate is from MS. A 2b and in | ||||
the original occurs on a page with wholly irrelevant text on matters | ||||
of natural history. M. RAVAISSON in his edition of the Paris MS. A | ||||
has reproduced this head and discussed it fully [note on page 12]; | ||||
he has however somewhat altered the original measurements. The | ||||
complicated calculations which M. RAVAISSON has given appear to me | ||||
in no way justified. The sketch, as we see it, can hardly have been | ||||
intended for any thing more than an experimental attempt to | ||||
ascertain relative proportions. We do not find that Leonardo made | ||||
use of circular lines in any other study of the proportions of the | ||||
human head. At the same time we see that the proportions of this | ||||
sketch are not in accordance with the rules which he usually | ||||
observed (see for instance No. 310).] | ||||
The head _a_ _f_ 1/6 larger than _n_ _f_. | ||||
315. | ||||
From the eyebrow to the junction of the lip with the chin, and the | ||||
angle of the jaw and the upper angle where the ear joins the temple | ||||
will be a perfect square. And each side by itself is half the head. | ||||
The hollow of the cheek bone occurs half way between the tip of the | ||||
nose and the top of the jaw bone, which is the lower angle of the | ||||
setting on of the ear, in the frame here represented. | ||||
From the angle of the eye-socket to the ear is as far as the length | ||||
of the ear, or the third of the face. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. IX. The text, in the original is written behind | ||||
the head. The handwriting would seem to indicate a date earlier than | ||||
1480. On the same leaf there is a drawing in red chalk of two | ||||
horsemen of which only a portion of the upper figure is here | ||||
visible. The whole leaf measures 22 1/2 centimetres wide by 29 long, | ||||
and is numbered 127 in the top right-hand corner.] | ||||
316. | ||||
From _a_ to _b_--that is to say from the roots of the hair in front | ||||
to the top of the head--ought to be equal to _c_ _d_;--that is from | ||||
the bottom of the nose to the meeting of the lips in the middle of | ||||
the mouth. From the inner corner of the eye _m_ to the top of the | ||||
head _a_ is as far as from _m_ down to the chin _s_. _s_ _c_ _f_ _b_ | ||||
are all at equal distances from each other. | ||||
[Footnote: The drawing in silver-point on bluish tinted paper--Pl. | ||||
X--which belongs to this chapter has been partly drawn over in ink | ||||
by Leonardo himself.] | ||||
317. | ||||
From the top of the head to the bottom of the chin is 1/9, and from | ||||
the roots of the hair to the chin is 1/9 of the distance from the | ||||
roots of the hair to the ground. The greatest width of the face is | ||||
equal to the space between the mouth and the roots of the hair and | ||||
is 1/12 of the whole height. From the top of the ear to the top of | ||||
the head is equal to the distance from the bottom of the chin to the | ||||
lachrymatory duct of the eye; and also equal to the distance from | ||||
the angle of the chin to that of the jaw; that is the 1/16 of the | ||||
whole. The small cartilage which projects over the opening of the | ||||
ear towards the nose is half-way between the nape and the eyebrow; | ||||
the thickness of the neck in profile is equal to the space between | ||||
the chin and the eyes, and to the space between the chin and the | ||||
jaw, and it is 1/18 of the height of the man. | ||||
318. | ||||
_a b_, _c d_, _e f_, _g h_, _i k_ are equal to each other in size | ||||
excepting that _d f_ is accidental. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XI.] | ||||
Proportions of the head seen in front (319-321). | ||||
319. | ||||
_a n o f_ are equal to the mouth. | ||||
_a c_ and _a f_ are equal to the space between one eye and the | ||||
other. | ||||
_n m o f q r_ are equal to half the width of the eye lids, that is | ||||
from the inner [lachrymatory] corner of the eye to its outer corner; | ||||
and in like manner the division between the chin and the mouth; and | ||||
in the same way the narrowest part of the nose between the eyes. And | ||||
these spaces, each in itself, is the 19th part of the head, _n o_ is | ||||
equal to the length of the eye or of the space between the eyes. | ||||
_m c_ is 1/3 of _n m_ measuring from the outer corner of the eyelids | ||||
to the letter _c_. _b s_ will be equal to the width of the nostril. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XII.] | ||||
320. | ||||
The distance between the centres of the pupils of the eyes is 1/3 of | ||||
the face. The space between the outer corners of the eyes, that is | ||||
where the eye ends in the eye socket which contains it, thus the | ||||
outer corners, is half the face. | ||||
The greatest width of the face at the line of the eyes is equal to | ||||
the distance from the roots of the hair in front to the parting of | ||||
the lips. | ||||
[Footnote: There are, with this section, two sketches of eyes, not | ||||
reproduced here.] | ||||
321. | ||||
The nose will make a double square; that is the width of the nose at | ||||
the nostrils goes twice into the length from the tip of the nose to | ||||
the eyebrows. And, in the same way, in profile the distance from the | ||||
extreme side of the nostril where it joins the cheek to the tip of | ||||
the nose is equal to the width of the nose in front from one nostril | ||||
to the other. If you divide the whole length of the nose--that is | ||||
from the tip to the insertion of the eyebrows, into 4 equal parts, | ||||
you will find that one of these parts extends from the tip of the | ||||
nostrils to the base of the nose, and the upper division lies | ||||
between the inner corner of the eye and the insertion of the | ||||
eyebrows; and the two middle parts [together] are equal to the | ||||
length of the eye from the inner to the outer corner. | ||||
[Footnote: The two bottom sketches on Pl. VII, No. 4 face the six | ||||
lines of this section,--With regard to the proportions of the head | ||||
in profile see No. 312.] | ||||
322. | ||||
The great toe is the sixth part of the foot, taking the measure in | ||||
profile, on the inside of the foot, from where this toe springs from | ||||
the ball of the sole of the foot to its tip _a b_; and it is equal | ||||
to the distance from the mouth to the bottom of the chin. If you | ||||
draw the foot in profile from the outside, make the little toe begin | ||||
at three quarters of the length of the foot, and you will find the | ||||
same distance from the insertion of this toe as to the farthest | ||||
prominence of the great toe. | ||||
323. | ||||
For each man respectively the distance between _a b_ is equal to _c | ||||
d_. | ||||
324. | ||||
Relative proportion of the hand and foot. | ||||
The foot is as much longer than the hand as the thickness of the arm | ||||
at the wrist where it is thinnest seen facing. | ||||
Again, you will find that the foot is as much longer than the hand | ||||
as the space between the inner angle of the little toe to the last | ||||
projection of the big toe, if you measure along the length of the | ||||
foot. | ||||
The palm of the hand without the fingers goes twice into the length | ||||
of the foot without the toes. | ||||
If you hold your hand with the fingers straight out and close | ||||
together you will find it to be of the same width as the widest part | ||||
of the foot, that is where it is joined onto the toes. | ||||
And if you measure from the prominence of the inner ancle to the end | ||||
of the great toe you will find this measure to be as long as the | ||||
whole hand. | ||||
From the top angle of the foot to the insertion of the toes is equal | ||||
to the hand from wrist joint to the tip of the thumb. | ||||
The smallest width of the hand is equal to the smallest width of the | ||||
foot between its joint into the leg and the insertion of the toes. | ||||
The width of the heel at the lower part is equal to that of the arm | ||||
where it joins the hand; and also to the leg where it is thinnest | ||||
when viewed in front. | ||||
The length of the longest toe, from its first division from the | ||||
great toe to its tip is the fourth of the foot from the centre of | ||||
the ancle bone to the tip, and it is equal to the width of the | ||||
mouth. The distance between the mouth and the chin is equal to that | ||||
of the knuckles and of the three middle fingers and to the length of | ||||
their first joints if the hand is spread, and equal to the distance | ||||
from the joint of the thumb to the outset of the nails, that is the | ||||
fourth part of the hand and of the face. | ||||
The space between the extreme poles inside and outside the foot | ||||
called the ancle or ancle bone _a b_ is equal to the space between | ||||
the mouth and the inner corner of the eye. | ||||
325. | ||||
The foot, from where it is attached to the leg, to the tip of the | ||||
great toe is as long as the space between the upper part of the chin | ||||
and the roots of the hair _a b_; and equal to five sixths of the | ||||
face. | ||||
326. | ||||
_a d_ is a head's length, _c b_ is a head's length. The four smaller | ||||
toes are all equally thick from the nail at the top to the bottom, | ||||
and are 1/13 of the foot. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XIV, No. 1, a drawing of a foot with the text in | ||||
three lines below it.] | ||||
327. | ||||
The whole length of the foot will lie between the elbow and the | ||||
wrist and between the elbow and the inner angle of the arm towards | ||||
the breast when the arm is folded. The foot is as long as the whole | ||||
head of a man, that is from under the chin to the topmost part of | ||||
the head[Footnote 2: _nel modo che qui i figurato_. See Pl. VII, No. | ||||
4, the upper figure. The text breaks off at the end of line 2 and | ||||
the text given under No. 321 follows below. It may be here remarked | ||||
that the second sketch on W. P. 311 has in the original no | ||||
explanatory text.] in the way here figured. | ||||
Proportions of the leg (328-331). | ||||
328. | ||||
The greatest thickness of the calf of the leg is at a third of its | ||||
height _a b_, and is a twentieth part thicker than the greatest | ||||
thickness of the foot. | ||||
_a c_ is half of the head, and equal to _d b_ and to the insertion | ||||
of the five toes _e f_. _d k_ diminishes one sixth in the leg _g h_. | ||||
_g h_ is 1/3 of the head; _m n_ increases one sixth from _a e_ and | ||||
is 7/12 of the head, _o p_ is 1/10 less than _d k_ and is 6/17 of | ||||
the head. _a_ is at half the distance between _b q_, and is 1/4 of | ||||
the man. _r_ is half way between _s_ and _b_[Footnote 11: _b_ is | ||||
here and later on measured on the right side of the foot as seen by | ||||
the spectator.]. The concavity of the knee outside _r_ is higher | ||||
than that inside _a_. The half of the whole height of the leg from | ||||
the foot _r_, is half way between the prominence _s_ and the ground | ||||
_b_. _v_ is half way between _t_ and _b_. The thickness of the thigh | ||||
seen in front is equal to the greatest width of the face, that is | ||||
2/3 of the length from the chin to the top of the head; _z r_ is 5/6 | ||||
of 7 to _v_; _m n_ is equal to 7 _v_ and is 1/4 of _r b_, _x y_ goes | ||||
3 times into _r b_, and into _r s_. | ||||
[Footnote 22-35: The sketch illustrating these lines is on Pl. XIII, | ||||
No. 2.] | ||||
[Footnote 22: a b _entra in_ c f 6 _e_ 6 _in_ c n. Accurate | ||||
measurement however obliges us to read 7 for 6.] _a b_ goes six | ||||
times into _c f_ and six times into _c n_ and is equal to _g h_; _i | ||||
k l m_ goes 4 times into _d f_, and 4 times into _d n_ and is 3/7 of | ||||
the foot; _p q r s_ goes 3 times into _d f, and 3 times into _b n_; | ||||
[Footnote: 25. _y_ is not to be found on the diagram and _x_ occurs | ||||
twice; this makes the passage very obscure.] _x y_ is 1/8 of _x f_ | ||||
and is equal to _n q_. 3 7 is 1/9 of _n f_; 4 5 is 1/10 of _n f_ | ||||
[Footnote: 22-27. Compare with this lines 18-24 of No. 331, and the | ||||
sketch of a leg in profile Pl. XV.]. | ||||
I want to know how much a man increases in height by standing on | ||||
tip-toe and how much _p g_ diminishes by stooping; and how much it | ||||
increases at _n q_ likewise in bending the foot. | ||||
[Footnote 34: _e f_ 4 _dal cazo_. By reading _i_ for _e_ the sense | ||||
of this passage is made clear.] _e f_ is four times in the distance | ||||
between the genitals and the sole of the foot; [Footnote 35: 2 is | ||||
not to be found in the sketch which renders the passage obscure. The | ||||
two last lines are plainly legible in the facsimile.] 3 7 is six | ||||
times from 3 to 2 and is equal to _g h_ and _i k_. | ||||
[Footnote: The drawing of a leg seen in front Pl. XIII, No. 1 | ||||
belongs to the text from lines 3-21. The measurements in this | ||||
section should be compared with the text No. 331, lines 1-13, and | ||||
the sketch of a leg seen in front on Pl. XV.] | ||||
329. | ||||
The length of the foot from the end of the toes to the heel goes | ||||
twice into that from the heel to the knee, that is where the leg | ||||
bone [fibula] joins the thigh bone [femur]. | ||||
330. | ||||
_a n b_ are equal; _c n d_ are equal; _n c_ makes two feet; _n d_ | ||||
makes 2 feet. | ||||
[Footnote: See the lower sketch, Pl. XIV, No. 1.] | ||||
331. | ||||
_m n o_ are equal. The narrowest width of the leg seen in front goes | ||||
8 times from the sole of the foot to the joint of the knee, and is | ||||
the same width as the arm, seen in front at the wrist, and as the | ||||
longest measure of the ear, and as the three chief divisions into | ||||
which we divide the face; and this measurement goes 4 times from the | ||||
wrist joint of the hand to the point of the elbow. [14] The foot is | ||||
as long as the space from the knee between _a_ and _b_; and the | ||||
patella of the knee is as long as the leg between _r_ and _s_. | ||||
[18] The least thickness of the leg in profile goes 6 times from the | ||||
sole of the foot to the knee joint and is the same width as the | ||||
space between the outer corner of the eye and the opening of the | ||||
ear, and as the thickest part of the arm seen in profile and between | ||||
the inner corner of the eye and the insertion of the hair. | ||||
_a b c_ [_d_] are all relatively of equal length, _c d_ goes twice | ||||
from the sole of the foot to the centre of the knee and the same | ||||
from the knee to the hip. | ||||
[28]_a b c_ are equal; _a_ to _b_ is 2 feet--that is to say | ||||
measuring from the heel to the tip of the great toe. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XV. The text of lines 2-17 is to the left of the | ||||
front view of the leg, to which it refers. Lines 18-27 are in the | ||||
middle column and refer to the leg seen in profile and turned to the | ||||
left, on the right hand side of the writing. Lines 20-30 are above, | ||||
to the left and apply to the sketch below them. | ||||
Some farther remarks on the proportion of the leg will be found in | ||||
No. 336, lines 6, 7.] | ||||
On the central point of the whole body. | ||||
332. | ||||
In kneeling down a man will lose the fourth part of his height. | ||||
When a man kneels down with his hands folded on his breast the navel | ||||
will mark half his height and likewise the points of the elbows. | ||||
Half the height of a man who sits--that is from the seat to the top | ||||
of the head--will be where the arms fold below the breast, and | ||||
below the shoulders. The seated portion--that is from the seat to | ||||
the top of the head--will be more than half the man's [whole height] | ||||
by the length of the scrotum. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. VIII, No. 2.] | ||||
The relative proportions of the torso and of the whole figure. | ||||
333. | ||||
The cubit is one fourth of the height of a man and is equal to the | ||||
greatest width of the shoulders. From the joint of one shoulder to | ||||
the other is two faces and is equal to the distance from the top of | ||||
the breast to the navel. [Footnote 9: _dalla detta somita_. It would | ||||
seem more accurate to read here _dal detto ombilico_.] From this | ||||
point to the genitals is a face's length. | ||||
[Footnote: Compare with this the sketches on the other page of the | ||||
same leaf. Pl. VIII, No. 2.] | ||||
The relative proportions of the head and of the torso. | ||||
334. | ||||
From the roots of the hair to the top of the breast _a b_ is the | ||||
sixth part of the height of a man and this measure is equal. | ||||
From the outside part of one shoulder to the other is the same | ||||
distance as from the top of the breast to the navel and this measure | ||||
goes four times from the sole of the foot to the lower end of the | ||||
nose. | ||||
The [thickness of] the arm where it springs from the shoulder in | ||||
front goes 6 times into the space between the two outside edges of | ||||
the shoulders and 3 times into the face, and four times into the | ||||
length of the foot and three into the hand, inside or outside. | ||||
[Footnote: The three sketches Pl. XIV, No. 2 belong to this text.] | ||||
The relative proportions of the torso and of the leg (335. 336). | ||||
335. | ||||
_a b c_ are equal to each other and to the space from the armpit of | ||||
the shoulder to the genitals and to the distance from the tip of the | ||||
fingers of the hand to the joint of the arm, and to the half of the | ||||
breast; and you must know that _c b_ is the third part of the height | ||||
of a man from the shoulders to the ground; _d e f_ are equal to each | ||||
other and equal to the greatest width of the shoulders. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XVI, No. 1.] | ||||
336. | ||||
--Top of the chin--hip--the insertion of the middle finger. The end | ||||
of the calf of the leg on the inside of the thigh.--The end of the | ||||
swelling of the shin bone of the leg. [6] The smallest thickness of | ||||
the leg goes 3 times into the thigh seen in front. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XVII, No. 2, middle sketch.] | ||||
The relative proportions of the torso and of the foot. | ||||
337. | ||||
The torso _a b_ in its thinnest part measures a foot; and from _a_ | ||||
to _b_ is 2 feet, which makes two squares to the seat--its thinnest | ||||
part goes 3 times into the length, thus making 3 squares. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl, VII, No. 2, the lower sketch.] | ||||
The proportions of the whole figure (338-341). | ||||
338. | ||||
A man when he lies down is reduced to 1/9 of his height. | ||||
339. | ||||
The opening of the ear, the joint of the shoulder, that of the hip | ||||
and the ancle are in perpendicular lines; _a n_ is equal to _m o_. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XVI, No. 2, the upper sketch.] | ||||
340. | ||||
From the chin to the roots of the hair is 1/10 of the whole figure. | ||||
From the joint of the palm of the hand to the tip of the longest | ||||
finger is 1/10. From the chin to the top of the head 1/8; and from | ||||
the pit of the stomach to the top of the breast is 1/6, and from the | ||||
pit below the breast bone to the top of the head 1/4. From the chin | ||||
to the nostrils 1/3 Part of the face, the same from the nostrils to | ||||
the brow and from the brow to the roots of the hair, and the foot is | ||||
1/6, the elbow 1/4, the width of the shoulders 1/4. | ||||
341. | ||||
The width of the shoulders is 1/4 of the whole. From the joint of | ||||
the shoulder to the hand is 1/3, from the parting of the lips to | ||||
below the shoulder-blade is one foot. | ||||
The greatest thickness of a man from the breast to the spine is one | ||||
8th of his height and is equal to the space between the bottom of | ||||
the chin and the top of the head. | ||||
The greatest width is at the shoulders and goes 4. | ||||
The torso from the front and back. | ||||
342. | ||||
The width of a man under the arms is the same as at the hips. | ||||
A man's width across the hips is equal to the distance from the top | ||||
of the hip to the bottom of the buttock, when a man stands equally | ||||
balanced on both feet; and there is the same distance from the top | ||||
of the hip to the armpit. The waist, or narrower part above the hips | ||||
will be half way between the arm pits and the bottom of the buttock. | ||||
[Footnote: The lower sketch Pl. XVI, No. 2, is drawn by the side of | ||||
line 1.] | ||||
Vitruvius' scheme of proportions. | ||||
343. | ||||
Vitruvius, the architect, says in his work on architecture that the | ||||
measurements of the human body are distributed by Nature as follows: | ||||
that is that 4 fingers make 1 palm, and 4 palms make 1 foot, 6 palms | ||||
make 1 cubit; 4 cubits make a man's height. And 4 cubits make one | ||||
pace and 24 palms make a man; and these measures he used in his | ||||
buildings. If you open your legs so much as to decrease your height | ||||
1/14 and spread and raise your arms till your middle fingers touch | ||||
the level of the top of your head you must know that the centre of | ||||
the outspread limbs will be in the navel and the space between the | ||||
legs will be an equilateral triangle. | ||||
The length of a man's outspread arms is equal to his height. | ||||
From the roots of the hair to the bottom of the chin is the tenth of | ||||
a man's height; from the bottom of the chin to the top of his head | ||||
is one eighth of his height; from the top of the breast to the top | ||||
of his head will be one sixth of a man. From the top of the breast | ||||
to the roots of the hair will be the seventh part of the whole man. | ||||
From the nipples to the top of the head will be the fourth part of a | ||||
man. The greatest width of the shoulders contains in itself the | ||||
fourth part of the man. From the elbow to the tip of the hand will | ||||
be the fifth part of a man; and from the elbow to the angle of the | ||||
armpit will be the eighth part of the man. The whole hand will be | ||||
the tenth part of the man; the beginning of the genitals marks the | ||||
middle of the man. The foot is the seventh part of the man. From the | ||||
sole of the foot to below the knee will be the fourth part of the | ||||
man. From below the knee to the beginning of the genitals will be | ||||
the fourth part of the man. The distance from the bottom of the chin | ||||
to the nose and from the roots of the hair to the eyebrows is, in | ||||
each case the same, and like the ear, a third of the face. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XVIII. The original leaf is 21 centimetres wide | ||||
and 33 1/2 long. At the ends of the scale below the figure are | ||||
written the words _diti_ (fingers) and _palmi_ (palms). The passage | ||||
quoted from Vitruvius is Book III, Cap. 1, and Leonardo's drawing is | ||||
given in the editions of Vitruvius by FRA GIOCONDO (Venezia 1511, | ||||
fol., Firenze 1513, 8vo.) and by CESARIANO (Como 1521).] | ||||
The arm and head. | ||||
344. | ||||
From _b_ to _a_ is one head, as well as from _c_ to _a_ and this | ||||
happens when the elbow forms a right angle. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XLI, No. 1.] | ||||
Proportions of the arm (345-349). | ||||
345. | ||||
From the tip of the longest finger of the hand to the shoulder joint | ||||
is four hands or, if you will, four faces. | ||||
_a b c_ are equal and each interval is 2 heads. | ||||
[Footnote: Lines 1-3 are given on Pl. XV below the front view of the | ||||
leg; lines 4 and 5 are below again, on the left side. The lettering | ||||
refers to the bent arm near the text.] | ||||
346. | ||||
The hand from the longest finger to the wrist joint goes 4 times | ||||
from the tip of the longest finger to the shoulder joint. | ||||
347. | ||||
_a b c_ are equal to each other and to the foot and to the space | ||||
between the nipple and the navel _d e_ will be the third part of the | ||||
whole man. | ||||
_f g_ is the fourth part of a man and is equal to _g h_ and measures | ||||
a cubit. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XIX, No. 1. 1. _mamolino_ (=_bambino_, little | ||||
child) may mean here the navel.] | ||||
348. | ||||
_a b_ goes 4 times into _a c_ and 9 into _a m_. The greatest | ||||
thickness of the arm between the elbow and the hand goes 6 times | ||||
into _a m_ and is equal to _r f_. The greatest thickness of the arm | ||||
between the shoulder and the elbow goes 4 times into _c m_, and is | ||||
equal to _h n g_. The smallest thickness of the arm above the elbow | ||||
_x y_ is not the base of a square, but is equal to half the space | ||||
_h_ 3 which is found between the inner joint of the arm and the | ||||
wrist joint. | ||||
[11]The width of the wrist goes 12 times into the whole arm; that is | ||||
from the tip of the fingers to the shoulder joint; that is 3 times | ||||
into the hand and 9 into the arm. | ||||
The arm when bent is 4 heads. | ||||
The arm from the shoulder to the elbow in bending increases in | ||||
length, that is in the length from the shoulder to the elbow, and | ||||
this increase is equal to the thickness of the arm at the wrist when | ||||
seen in profile. And the space between the bottom of the chin and | ||||
the parting of the lips, is equal to the thickness of the 2 middle | ||||
fingers, and to the width of the mouth and to the space between the | ||||
roots of the hair on the forehead and the top of the head [Footnote: | ||||
_Queste cose_. This passage seems to have been written on purpose to | ||||
rectify the foregoing lines. The error is explained by the | ||||
accompanying sketch of the bones of the arm.]. All these distances | ||||
are equal to each other, but they are not equal to the | ||||
above-mentioned increase in the arm. | ||||
The arm between the elbow and wrist never increases by being bent or | ||||
extended. | ||||
The arm, from the shoulder to the inner joint when extended. | ||||
When the arm is extended, _p n_ is equal to _n a_. And when it is | ||||
bent _n a_ diminishes 1/6 of its length and _p n_ does the same. The | ||||
outer elbow joint increases 1/7 when bent; and thus by being bent it | ||||
increases to the length of 2 heads. And on the inner side, by | ||||
bending, it is found that whereas the arm from where it joins the | ||||
side to the wrist, was 2 heads and a half, in bending it loses the | ||||
half head and measures only two: one from the [shoulder] joint to | ||||
the end [by the elbow], and the other to the hand. | ||||
The arm when folded will measure 2 faces up to the shoulder from the | ||||
elbow and 2 from the elbow to the insertion of the four fingers on | ||||
the palm of the hand. The length from the base of the fingers to the | ||||
elbow never alters in any position of the arm. | ||||
If the arm is extended it decreases by 1/3 of the length between _b_ | ||||
and _h_; and if--being extended--it is bent, it will increase the | ||||
half of _o e_. [Footnote 59-61: The figure sketched in the margin is | ||||
however drawn to different proportions.] The length from the | ||||
shoulder to the elbow is the same as from the base of the thumb, | ||||
inside, to the elbow _a b c_. | ||||
[Footnote 62-64: The arm sketch on the margin of the MS. is | ||||
identically the same as that given below on Pl. XX which may | ||||
therefore be referred to in this place. In line 62 we read therefore | ||||
_z c_ for _m n_.] The smallest thickness of the arm in profile _z c_ | ||||
goes 6 times between the knuckles of the hand and the dimple of the | ||||
elbow when extended and 14 times in the whole arm and 42 in the | ||||
whole man [64]. The greatest thickness of the arm in profile is | ||||
equal to the greatest thickness of the arm in front; but the first | ||||
is placed at a third of the arm from the shoulder joint to the elbow | ||||
and the other at a third from the elbow towards the hand. | ||||
[Footnote: Compare Pl. XVII. Lines 1-10 and 11-15 are written in two | ||||
columns below the extended arm, and at the tips of the fingers we | ||||
find the words: _fine d'unghie_ (ends of the nails). Part of the | ||||
text--lines 22 to 25--is visible by the side of the sketches on Pl. | ||||
XXXV, No. 1.] | ||||
349. | ||||
From the top of the shoulder to the point of the elbow is as far as | ||||
from that point to the joints of the four fingers with the palm of | ||||
the hand, and each is 2 faces. | ||||
[5]_a e_ is equal to the palm of the hand, _r f_ and _o g_ are equal | ||||
to half a head and each goes 4 times into _a b_ and _b c_. From _c_ | ||||
to _m_ is 1/2 a head; _m n_ is 1/3 of a head and goes 6 times into | ||||
_c b_ and into _b a_; _a b_ loses 1/7 of its length when the arm is | ||||
extended; _c b_ never alters; _o_ will always be the middle point | ||||
between _a_ and _s_. | ||||
_y l_ is the fleshy part of the arm and measures one head; and when | ||||
the arm is bent this shrinks 2/5 of its length; _o a_ in bending | ||||
loses 1/6 and so does _o r_. | ||||
_a b_ is 1/7 of _r c_. _f s_ will be 1/8 of _r c_, and each of those | ||||
2 measurements is the largest of the arm; _k h_ is the thinnest part | ||||
between the shoulder and the elbow and it is 1/8 of the whole arm _r | ||||
c_; _o p_ is 1/5 of _r l_; _c z_ goes 13 times into _r c_. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XX where the text is also seen from lines 5-23.] | ||||
The movement of the arm (350-354). | ||||
350. | ||||
In the innermost bend of the joints of every limb the reliefs are | ||||
converted into a hollow, and likewise every hollow of the innermost | ||||
bends becomes a convexity when the limb is straightened to the | ||||
utmost. And in this very great mistakes are often made by those who | ||||
have insufficient knowledge and trust to their own invention and do | ||||
not have recourse to the imitation of nature; and these variations | ||||
occur more in the middle of the sides than in front, and more at the | ||||
back than at the sides. | ||||
351. | ||||
When the arm is bent at an angle at the elbow, it will produce some | ||||
angle; the more acute the angle is, the more will the muscles within | ||||
the bend be shortened; while the muscles outside will become of | ||||
greater length than before. As is shown in the example; _d c e_ will | ||||
shrink considerably; and _b n_ will be much extended. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XIX, No. 2.] | ||||
352. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
The arm, as it turns, thrusts back its shoulder towards the middle | ||||
of the back. | ||||
353. | ||||
The principal movements of the hand are 10; that is forwards, | ||||
backwards, to right and to left, in a circular motion, up or down, | ||||
to close and to open, and to spread the fingers or to press them | ||||
together. | ||||
354. | ||||
OF THE MOTIONS OF THE FINGERS. | ||||
The movements of the fingers principally consist in extending and | ||||
bending them. This extension and bending vary in manner; that is, | ||||
sometimes they bend altogether at the first joint; sometimes they | ||||
bend, or extend, half way, at the 2nd joint; and sometimes they bend | ||||
in their whole length and in all the three joints at once. If the 2 | ||||
first joints are hindered from bending, then the 3rd joint can be | ||||
bent with greater ease than before; it can never bend of itself, if | ||||
the other joints are free, unless all three joints are bent. Besides | ||||
all these movements there are 4 other principal motions of which 2 | ||||
are up and down, the two others from side to side; and each of these | ||||
is effected by a single tendon. From these there follow an infinite | ||||
number of other movements always effected by two tendons; one tendon | ||||
ceasing to act, the other takes up the movement. The tendons are | ||||
made thick inside the fingers and thin outside; and the tendons | ||||
inside are attached to every joint but outside they are not. | ||||
[Footnote 26: This head line has, in the original, no text to | ||||
follow.] Of the strength [and effect] of the 3 tendons inside the | ||||
fingers at the 3 joints. | ||||
The movement of the torso (355-361). | ||||
355. | ||||
Observe the altered position of the shoulder in all the movements of | ||||
the arm, going up and down, inwards and outwards, to the back and to | ||||
the front, and also in circular movements and any others. | ||||
And do the same with reference to the neck, hands and feet and the | ||||
breast above the lips &c. | ||||
356. | ||||
Three are the principal muscles of the shoulder, that is _b c d_, | ||||
and two are the lateral muscles which move it forward and backward, | ||||
that is _a o_; _a_ moves it forward, and _o_ pulls it back; and bed | ||||
raises it; _a b c_ moves it upwards and forwards, and _c d o_ | ||||
upwards and backwards. Its own weight almost suffices to move it | ||||
downwards. | ||||
The muscle _d_ acts with the muscle _c_ when the arm moves forward; | ||||
and in moving backward the muscle _b_ acts with the muscle _c_. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXI. In the original the lettering has been | ||||
written in ink upon the red chalk drawing and the outlines of the | ||||
figures have in most places been inked over.] | ||||
357. | ||||
OF THE LOINS, WHEN BENT. | ||||
The loins or backbone being bent. The breasts are are always lower | ||||
than the shoulderblades of the back. | ||||
If the breast bone is arched the breasts are higher than the | ||||
shoulderblades. | ||||
If the loins are upright the breast will always be found at the same | ||||
level as the shoulderblades. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXII, No. 1.] | ||||
358. | ||||
_a b_ the tendon and ankle in raising the heel approach each other | ||||
by a finger's breadth; in lowering it they separate by a finger's | ||||
breadth. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXII, No. 2. Compare this facsimile and text with | ||||
Pl. III, No. 2, and p. 152 of MANZI'S edition. Also with No. 274 of | ||||
LUDWIG'S edition of the Vatican Copy.] | ||||
359. | ||||
Just so much as the part _d a_ of the nude figure decreases in this | ||||
position so much does the opposite part increase; that is: in | ||||
proportion as the length of the part _d a_ diminishes the normal | ||||
size so does the opposite upper part increase beyond its [normal] | ||||
size. The navel does not change its position to the male organ; and | ||||
this shrinking arises because when a figure stands on one foot, that | ||||
foot becomes the centre [of gravity] of the superimposed weight. | ||||
This being so, the middle between the shoulders is thrust above it | ||||
out of it perpendicular line, and this line, which forms the central | ||||
line of the external parts of the body, becomes bent at its upper | ||||
extremity [so as to be] above the foot which supports the body; and | ||||
the transverse lines are forced into such angles that their ends are | ||||
lower on the side which is supported. As is shown at _a b c_. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXII, No. 3.] | ||||
360. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
Note in the motions and attitudes of figures how the limbs vary, and | ||||
their feeling, for the shoulderblades in the motions of the arms and | ||||
shoulders vary the [line of the] back bone very much. And you will | ||||
find all the causes of this in my book of Anatomy. | ||||
361. | ||||
OF [CHANGE OF] ATTITUDE. | ||||
The pit of the throat is over the feet, and by throwing one arm | ||||
forward the pit of the throat is thrown off that foot. And if the | ||||
leg is thrown forward the pit of the throat is thrown forward; and. | ||||
so it varies in every attitude. | ||||
362. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
Indicate which are the muscles, and which the tendons, which become | ||||
prominent or retreat in the different movements of each limb; or | ||||
which do neither [but are passive]. And remember that these | ||||
indications of action are of the first importance and necessity in | ||||
any painter or sculptor who professes to be a master &c. | ||||
And indicate the same in a child, and from birth to decrepitude at | ||||
every stage of its life; as infancy, childhood, boyhood, youth &c. | ||||
And in each express the alterations in the limbs and joints, which | ||||
swell and which grow thinner. | ||||
363. | ||||
O Anatomical Painter! beware lest the too strong indication of the | ||||
bones, sinews and muscles, be the cause of your becoming wooden in | ||||
your painting by your wish to make your nude figures display all | ||||
their feeling. Therefore, in endeavouring to remedy this, look in | ||||
what manner the muscles clothe or cover their bones in old or lean | ||||
persons; and besides this, observe the rule as to how these same | ||||
muscles fill up the spaces of the surface that extend between them, | ||||
which are the muscles which never lose their prominence in any | ||||
amount of fatness; and which too are the muscles of which the | ||||
attachments are lost to sight in the very least plumpness. And in | ||||
many cases several muscles look like one single muscle in the | ||||
increase of fat; and in many cases, in growing lean or old, one | ||||
single muscle divides into several muscles. And in this treatise, | ||||
each in its place, all their peculiarities will be explained--and | ||||
particularly as to the spaces between the joints of each limb &c. | ||||
Again, do not fail [to observe] the variations in the forms of the | ||||
above mentioned muscles, round and about the joints of the limbs of | ||||
any animal, as caused by the diversity of the motions of each limb; | ||||
for on some side of those joints the prominence of these muscles is | ||||
wholly lost in the increase or diminution of the flesh of which | ||||
these muscles are composed, &c. | ||||
[Footnote: DE ROSSI remarks on this chapter, in the Roman edition of | ||||
the Trattato, p. 504: "_Non in questo luogo solo, ma in altri ancora | ||||
osservera il lettore, che Lionardo va fungendo quelli che fanno | ||||
abuso della loro dottrina anatomica, e sicuramente con cio ha in | ||||
mira il suo rivale Bonarroti, che di anatomia facea tanta pompa_." | ||||
Note, that Leonardo wrote this passage in Rome, probably under the | ||||
immediate impression of MICHAELANGELO'S paintings in the Sistine | ||||
Chapel and of RAPHAEL'S Isaiah in Sant' Agostino.] | ||||
364. | ||||
OF THE DIFFERENT MEASUREMENTS OF BOYS AND MEN. | ||||
There is a great difference in the length between the joints in men | ||||
and boys for, in man, from the top of the shoulder [by the neck] to | ||||
the elbow, and from the elbow to the tip of the thumb and from one | ||||
shoulder to the other, is in each instance two heads, while in a boy | ||||
it is but one because Nature constructs in us the mass which is the | ||||
home of the intellect, before forming that which contains the vital | ||||
elements. | ||||
365. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
Which are the muscles which subdivide in old age or in youth, when | ||||
becoming lean? Which are the parts of the limbs of the human frame | ||||
where no amount of fat makes the flesh thicker, nor any degree of | ||||
leanness ever diminishes it? | ||||
The thing sought for in this question will be found in all the | ||||
external joints of the bones, as the shoulder, elbow, wrists, | ||||
finger-joints, hips, knees, ankle-bone and toes and the like; all of | ||||
which shall be told in its place. The greatest thickness acquired by | ||||
any limb is at the part of the muscles which is farthest from its | ||||
attachments. | ||||
Flesh never increases on those portions of the limb where the bones | ||||
are near to the surface. | ||||
At _b r d a c e f_ the increase or diminution of the flesh never | ||||
makes any considerable difference. Nature has placed in front of man | ||||
all those parts which feel most pain under a blow; and these are the | ||||
shin of the leg, the forehead, and the nose. And this was done for | ||||
the preservation of man, since, if such pain were not felt in these | ||||
parts, the number of blows to which they would be exposed must be | ||||
the cause of their destruction. | ||||
Describe why the bones of the arm and leg are double near the hand | ||||
and foot [respectively]. | ||||
And where the flesh is thicker or thinner in the bending of the | ||||
limbs. | ||||
366. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
Every part of the whole must be in proportion to the whole. Thus, if | ||||
a man is of a stout short figure he will be the same in all his | ||||
parts: that is with short and thick arms, wide thick hands, with | ||||
short fingers with their joints of the same character, and so on | ||||
with the rest. I would have the same thing understood as applying to | ||||
all animals and plants; in diminishing, [the various parts] do so in | ||||
due proportion to the size, as also in enlarging. | ||||
367. | ||||
OF THE AGREEMENT OF THE PROPORTION OF THE LIMBS. | ||||
And again, remember to be very careful in giving your figures limbs, | ||||
that they must appear to agree with the size of the body and | ||||
likewise to the age. Thus a youth has limbs that are not very | ||||
muscular not strongly veined, and the surface is delicate and round, | ||||
and tender in colour. In man the limbs are sinewy and muscular, | ||||
while in old men the surface is wrinkled, rugged and knotty, and the | ||||
sinews very prominent. | ||||
HOW YOUNG BOYS HAVE THEIR JOINTS JUST THE REVERSE OF THOSE OF MEN, | ||||
AS TO SIZE. | ||||
Little children have all the joints slender and the portions between | ||||
them are thick; and this happens because nothing but the skin covers | ||||
the joints without any other flesh and has the character of sinew, | ||||
connecting the bones like a ligature. And the fat fleshiness is laid | ||||
on between one joint and the next, and between the skin and the | ||||
bones. But, since the bones are thicker at the joints than between | ||||
them, as a mass grows up the flesh ceases to have that superfluity | ||||
which it had, between the skin and the bones; whence the skin clings | ||||
more closely to the bone and the limbs grow more slender. But since | ||||
there is nothing over the joints but the cartilaginous and sinewy | ||||
skin this cannot dry up, and, not drying up, cannot shrink. Thus, | ||||
and for this reason, children are slender at the joints and fat | ||||
between the joints; as may be seen in the joints of the fingers, | ||||
arms, and shoulders, which are slender and dimpled, while in man on | ||||
the contrary all the joints of the fingers, arms, and legs are | ||||
thick; and wherever children have hollows men have prominences. | ||||
The movement of the human figure (368-375). | ||||
368. | ||||
Of the manner of representing the 18 actions of man. Repose, | ||||
movement, running, standing, supported, sitting, leaning, kneeling, | ||||
lying down, suspended. Carrying or being carried, thrusting, | ||||
pulling, striking, being struck, pressing down and lifting up. | ||||
[As to how a figure should stand with a weight in its hand [Footnote | ||||
8: The original text ends here.] Remember]. | ||||
369. | ||||
A sitting man cannot raise himself if that part of his body which is | ||||
front of his axis [centre of gravity] does not weigh more than that | ||||
which is behind that axis [or centre] without using his arms. | ||||
A man who is mounting any slope finds that he must involuntarily | ||||
throw the most weight forward, on the higher foot, rather than | ||||
behind--that is in front of the axis and not behind it. Hence a man | ||||
will always, involuntarily, throw the greater weight towards the | ||||
point whither he desires to move than in any other direction. | ||||
The faster a man runs, the more he leans forward towards the point | ||||
he runs to and throws more weight in front of his axis than behind. | ||||
A man who runs down hill throws the axis onto his heels, and one who | ||||
runs up hill throws it into the points of his feet; and a man | ||||
running on level ground throws it first on his heels and then on the | ||||
points of his feet. | ||||
This man cannot carry his own weight unless, by drawing his body | ||||
back he balances the weight in front, in such a way as that the foot | ||||
on which he stands is the centre of gravity. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXII, No. 4.] | ||||
370. | ||||
How a man proceeds to raise himself to his feet, when he is sitting | ||||
on level ground. | ||||
371. | ||||
A man when walking has his head in advance of his feet. | ||||
A man when walking across a long level plain first leans [rather] | ||||
backwards and then as much forwards. | ||||
[Footnote 3-6: He strides forward with the air of a man going down | ||||
hill; when weary, on the contrary he walks like a man going up | ||||
hill.] | ||||
372. | ||||
A man when running throws less weight on his legs than when standing | ||||
still. And in the same way a horse which is running feels less the | ||||
weight of the man he carries. Hence many persons think it wonderful | ||||
that, in running, the horse can rest on one single foot. From this | ||||
it may be stated that when a weight is in progressive motion the | ||||
more rapid it is the less is the perpendicular weight towards the | ||||
centre. | ||||
373. | ||||
If a man, in taking a jump from firm ground, can leap 3 braccia, and | ||||
when he was taking his leap it were to recede 1/3 of a braccio, that | ||||
would be taken off his former leap; and so if it were thrust forward | ||||
1/3 of a braccio, by how much would his leap be increased? | ||||
374. | ||||
OF DRAWING. | ||||
When a man who is running wants to neutralise the impetus that | ||||
carries him on he prepares a contrary impetus which is generated by | ||||
his hanging backwards. This can be proved, since, if the impetus | ||||
carries a moving body with a momentum equal to 4 and the moving body | ||||
wants to turn and fall back with a momentum of 4, then one momentum | ||||
neutralises the other contrary one, and the impetus is neutralised. | ||||
Of walking up and down (375-379) | ||||
375. | ||||
When a man wants to stop running and check the impetus he is forced | ||||
to hang back and take short quick steps. [Footnote: Lines 5-31 refer | ||||
to the two upper figures, and the lower figure to the right is | ||||
explained by the last part of the chapter.] The centre of gravity of | ||||
a man who lifts one of his feet from the ground always rests on the | ||||
centre of the sole of the foot [he stands on]. | ||||
A man, in going up stairs involuntarily throws so much weight | ||||
forward and on the side of the upper foot as to be a counterpoise to | ||||
the lower leg, so that the labour of this lower leg is limited to | ||||
moving itself. | ||||
The first thing a man does in mounting steps is to relieve the leg | ||||
he is about to lift of the weight of the body which was resting on | ||||
that leg; and besides this, he gives to the opposite leg all the | ||||
rest of the bulk of the whole man, including [the weight of] the | ||||
other leg; he then raises the other leg and sets the foot upon the | ||||
step to which he wishes to raise himself. Having done this he | ||||
restores to the upper foot all the weight of the body and of the leg | ||||
itself, and places his hand on his thigh and throws his head forward | ||||
and repeats the movement towards the point of the upper foot, | ||||
quickly lifting the heel of the lower one; and with this impetus he | ||||
lifts himself up and at the same time extends the arm which rested | ||||
on his knee; and this extension of the arm carries up the body and | ||||
the head, and so straightens the spine which was curved. | ||||
[32] The higher the step is which a man has to mount, the farther | ||||
forward will he place his head in advance of his upper foot, so as | ||||
to weigh more on _a_ than on _b_; this man will not be on the step | ||||
_m_. As is shown by the line _g f_. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXIII, No. 1. The lower sketch to the left | ||||
belongs to the four first lines.] | ||||
376. | ||||
I ask the weight [pressure] of this man at every degree of motion on | ||||
these steps, what weight he gives to _b_ and to _c_. | ||||
[Footnote 8: These lines are, in the original, written in ink] | ||||
Observe the perpendicular line below the centre of gravity of the | ||||
man. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXIII, No. 2.] | ||||
377. | ||||
In going up stairs if you place your hands on your knees all the | ||||
labour taken by the arms is removed from the sinews at the back of | ||||
the knees. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXIII, No. 3.] | ||||
378. | ||||
The sinew which guides the leg, and which is connected with the | ||||
patella of the knee, feels it a greater labour to carry the man | ||||
upwards, in proportion as the leg is more bent; and the muscle which | ||||
acts upon the angle made by the thigh where it joins the body has | ||||
less difficulty and has a less weight to lift, because it has not | ||||
the [additional] weight of the thigh itself. And besides this it has | ||||
stronger muscles, being those which form the buttock. | ||||
379. | ||||
A man coming down hill takes little steps, because the weight rests | ||||
upon the hinder foot, while a man mounting takes wide steps, because | ||||
his weight rests on the foremost foot. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXIII, No. 4.] | ||||
On the human body in action (380-388). | ||||
380. | ||||
OF THE HUMAN BODY IN ACTION. | ||||
When you want to represent a man as moving some weight consider what | ||||
the movements are that are to be represented by different lines; | ||||
that is to say either from below upwards, with a simple movement, as | ||||
a man does who stoops forward to take up a weight which he will lift | ||||
as he straightens himself. Or as a man does who wants to squash | ||||
something backwards, or to force it forwards or to pull it downwards | ||||
with ropes passed through pullies [Footnote 10: Compare the sketch | ||||
on page 198 and on 201 (S. K. M. II.1 86b).]. And here remember that | ||||
the weight of a man pulls in proportion as his centre of gravity is | ||||
distant from his fulcrum, and to this is added the force given by | ||||
his legs and bent back as he raises himself. | ||||
381. | ||||
Again, a man has even a greater store of strength in his legs than | ||||
he needs for his own weight; and to see if this is true, make a man | ||||
stand on the shore-sand and then put another man on his back, and | ||||
you will see how much he will sink in. Then take the man from off | ||||
his back and make him jump straight up as high as he can, and you | ||||
will find that the print of his feet will be made deeper by the jump | ||||
than from having the man on his back. Hence, here, by 2 methods it | ||||
is proved that a man has double the strength he requires to support | ||||
his own body. | ||||
382. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
If you have to draw a man who is in motion, or lifting or pulling, | ||||
or carrying a weight equal to his own, in what way must you set on | ||||
his legs below his body? | ||||
[Footnote: In the MS. this question remains unanswered.] | ||||
383. | ||||
OF THE STRENGTH OF MAN. | ||||
A man pulling a [dead] weight balanced against himself cannot pull | ||||
more than his own weight. And if he has to raise it he will [be able | ||||
to] raise as much more than his weight as his strength may be more | ||||
than that of other men. [Footnote 7: The stroke at the end of this | ||||
line finishes in the original in a sort of loop or flourish, and a | ||||
similar flourish occurs at the end of the previous passage written | ||||
on the same page. M. RAVAISSON regards these as numbers (compare the | ||||
photograph of page 30b in his edition of MS. A). He remarks: "_Ce | ||||
chiffre_ 8 _et, a la fin de l'alinea precedent, le chiffre_ 7 _sont, | ||||
dans le manuscrit, des renvois_."] The greatest force a man can | ||||
apply, with equal velocity and impetus, will be when he sets his | ||||
feet on one end of the balance [or lever] and then presses his | ||||
shoulders against some stable body. This will raise a weight at the | ||||
other end of the balance [lever], equal to his own weight and [added | ||||
to that] as much weight as he can carry on his shoulders. | ||||
384. | ||||
No animal can simply move [by its dead weight] a greater weight than | ||||
the sum of its own weight outside the centre of his fulcrum. | ||||
385. | ||||
A man who wants to send an arrow very far from the bow must be | ||||
standing entirely on one foot and raising the other so far from the | ||||
foot he stands on as to afford the requisite counterpoise to his | ||||
body which is thrown on the front foot. And he must not hold his arm | ||||
fully extended, and in order that he may be more able to bear the | ||||
strain he must hold a piece of wood which there is in all crossbows, | ||||
extending from the hand to the breast, and when he wishes to shoot | ||||
he suddenly leaps forward at the same instant and extends his arm | ||||
with the bow and releases the string. And if he dexterously does | ||||
every thing at once it will go a very long way. | ||||
386. | ||||
When two men are at the opposite ends of a plank that is balanced, | ||||
and if they are of equal weight, and if one of them wants to make a | ||||
leap into the air, then his leap will be made down from his end of | ||||
the plank and the man will never go up again but must remain in his | ||||
place till the man at the other end dashes up the board. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXIV, No. 3.] | ||||
387. | ||||
Of delivering a blow to the right or left. | ||||
[Footnote: Four sketches on Pl. XXIV, No. 1 belong to this passage. | ||||
The rest of the sketches and notes on that page are of a | ||||
miscellaneous nature.] | ||||
388. | ||||
Why an impetus is not spent at once [but diminishes] gradually in | ||||
some one direction? [Footnote 1: The paper has been damaged at the | ||||
end of line 1.] The impetus acquired in the line _a b c d_ is spent | ||||
in the line _d e_ but not so completely but that some of its force | ||||
remains in it and to this force is added the momentum in the line _d | ||||
e_ with the force of the motive power, and it must follow than the | ||||
impetus multiplied by the blow is greater that the simple impetus | ||||
produced by the momentum _d e_. | ||||
[Footnote 8: The sketch No. 2 on Pl. XXIV stands, in the original, | ||||
between lines 7 and 8. Compare also the sketches on Pl. LIV.] A man | ||||
who has to deal a great blow with his weapon prepares himself with | ||||
all his force on the opposite side to that where the spot is which | ||||
he is to hit; and this is because a body as it gains in velocity | ||||
gains in force against the object which impedes its motion. | ||||
On hair falling down in curls. | ||||
389. | ||||
Observe the motion of the surface of the water which resembles that | ||||
of hair, and has two motions, of which one goes on with the flow of | ||||
the surface, the other forms the lines of the eddies; thus the water | ||||
forms eddying whirlpools one part of which are due to the impetus of | ||||
the principal current and the other to the incidental motion and | ||||
return flow. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXV. Where also the text of this passage is given | ||||
in facsimile.] | ||||
On draperies (390--392). | ||||
390. | ||||
OF THE NATURE OF THE FOLDS IN DRAPERY. | ||||
That part of a fold which is farthest from the ends where it is | ||||
confined will fall most nearly in its natural form. | ||||
Every thing by nature tends to remain at rest. Drapery, being of | ||||
equal density and thickness on its wrong side and on its right, has | ||||
a tendency to lie flat; therefore when you give it a fold or plait | ||||
forcing it out of its flatness note well the result of the | ||||
constraint in the part where it is most confined; and the part which | ||||
is farthest from this constraint you will see relapses most into the | ||||
natural state; that is to say lies free and flowing. | ||||
EXAMPLE. | ||||
[Footnote 13: _a c sia_. In the original text _b_ is written instead | ||||
of _c_--an evident slip of the pen.] Let _a b c_ be the fold of the | ||||
drapery spoken of above, _a c_ will be the places where this folded | ||||
drapery is held fast. I maintain that the part of the drapery which | ||||
is farthest from the plaited ends will revert most to its natural | ||||
form. | ||||
Therefore, _b_ being farthest from _a_ and _c_ in the fold _a b c_ | ||||
it will be wider there than anywhere else. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXVIII, No. 6, and compare the drawing from | ||||
Windsor Pl. XXX for farther illustration of what is here stated.] | ||||
391. | ||||
OF SMALL FOLDS IN DRAPERIES. | ||||
How figures dressed in a cloak should not show the shape so much as | ||||
that the cloak looks as if it were next the flesh; since you surely | ||||
cannot wish the cloak to be next the flesh, for you must suppose | ||||
that between the flesh and the cloak there are other garments which | ||||
prevent the forms of the limbs appearing distinctly through the | ||||
cloak. And those limbs which you allow to be seen you must make | ||||
thicker so that the other garments may appear to be under the cloak. | ||||
But only give something of the true thickness of the limbs to a | ||||
nymph [Footnote 9: _Una nifa_. Compare the beautiful drawing of a | ||||
Nymph, in black chalk from the Windsor collection, Pl. XXVI.] or an | ||||
angel, which are represented in thin draperies, pressed and clinging | ||||
to the limbs of the figures by the action of the wind. | ||||
392. | ||||
You ought not to give to drapery a great confusion of many folds, | ||||
but rather only introduce them where they are held by the hands or | ||||
the arms; the rest you may let fall simply where it is its nature to | ||||
flow; and do not let the nude forms be broken by too many details | ||||
and interrupted folds. How draperies should be drawn from nature: | ||||
that is to say if youwant to represent woollen cloth draw the folds | ||||
from that; and if it is to be silk, or fine cloth or coarse, or of | ||||
linen or of crape, vary the folds in each and do not represent | ||||
dresses, as many do, from models covered with paper or thin leather | ||||
which will deceive you greatly. | ||||
[Footnote: The little pen and ink drawing from Windsor (W. 102), | ||||
given on Pl. XXVIII, No. 7, clearly illustrates the statement made | ||||
at the beginning of this passage; the writing of the cipher 19 on | ||||
the same page is in Leonardo's hand; the cipher 21 is certainly | ||||
not.] | ||||
_VIII._ | ||||
_Botany for Painters and Elements of Landscape Painting._ | ||||
_The chapters composing this portion of the work consist of | ||||
observations on Form, Light and Shade in Plants, and particularly in | ||||
Trees summed up in certain general rules by which the author intends | ||||
to guide the artist in the pictorial representation of landscape._ | ||||
_With these the first principles of a_ Theory of Landscape painting | ||||
_are laid down--a theory as profoundly thought out in its main | ||||
lines as it is lucidly worked out in its details. In reading these | ||||
chapters the conviction is irresistible that such a_ Botany for | ||||
painters _is or ought to be of similar importance in the practice of | ||||
painting as the principles of the Proportions and Movements of the | ||||
human figure_ i. e. Anatomy for painters. | ||||
_There can be no doubt that Leonardo, in laying down these rules, | ||||
did not intend to write on Botany in the proper scientific | ||||
sense--his own researches on that subject have no place here; it | ||||
need only be observed that they are easily distinguished by their | ||||
character and contents from those which are here collected and | ||||
arranged under the title 'Botany for painters'. In some cases where | ||||
this division might appear doubtful,--as for instance in No._ | ||||
402--_the Painter is directly addressed and enjoined to take the | ||||
rule to heart as of special importance in his art._ | ||||
_The original materials are principally derived from MS._ G, _in | ||||
which we often find this subject treated on several pages in | ||||
succession without any of that intermixture of other matters, which | ||||
is so frequent in Leonardo's writings. This MS., too, is one of the | ||||
latest; when it was written, the great painter was already more than | ||||
sixty years of age, so we can scarcely doubt that he regarded all he | ||||
wrote as his final views on the subject. And the same remark applies | ||||
to the chapters from MSS._ E _and_ M _which were also written | ||||
between_ 1513--15. | ||||
_For the sake of clearness, however, it has been desirable to | ||||
sacrifice--with few exceptions--the original order of the passages | ||||
as written, though it was with much reluctance and only after long | ||||
hesitation that I resigned myself to this necessity. Nor do I mean | ||||
to impugn the logical connection of the author's ideas in his MS.; | ||||
but it will be easily understood that the sequence of disconnected | ||||
notes, as they occurred to Leonardo and were written down from time | ||||
to time, might be hardly satisfactory as a systematic arrangement of | ||||
his principles. The reader will find in the Appendix an exact | ||||
account of the order of the chapters in the original MS. and from | ||||
the data there given can restore them at will. As the materials are | ||||
here arranged, the structure of the tree as regards the growth of | ||||
the branches comes first_ (394-411) _and then the insertion of the | ||||
leaves on the stems_ (412-419). _Then follow the laws of Light and | ||||
Shade as applied, first, to the leaves (420-434), and, secondly, to | ||||
the whole tree and to groups of trees_ (435-457). _After the remarks | ||||
on the Light and Shade in landscapes generally_ (458-464), _we find | ||||
special observations on that of views of towns and buildings_ | ||||
(465-469). _To the theory of Landscape Painting belong also the | ||||
passages on the effect of Wind on Trees_ (470-473) _and on the Light | ||||
and Shade of Clouds_ (474-477), _since we find in these certain | ||||
comparisons with the effect of Light and Shade on Trees_ (e. g.: _in | ||||
No._ 476, 4. 5; _and No._ 477, 9. 12). _The chapters given in the | ||||
Appendix Nos._ 478 _and_ 481 _have hardly any connection with the | ||||
subjects previously treated._ | ||||
Classification of trees. | ||||
393. | ||||
TREES. | ||||
Small, lofty, straggling, thick, that is as to foliage, dark, light, | ||||
russet, branched at the top; some directed towards the eye, some | ||||
downwards; with white stems; this transparent in the air, that not; | ||||
some standing close together, some scattered. | ||||
The relative thickness of the branches to the trunk (393--396). | ||||
394. | ||||
All the branches of a tree at every stage of its height when put | ||||
together are equal in thickness to the trunk [below them]. | ||||
All the branches of a water [course] at every stage of its course, | ||||
if they are of equal rapidity, are equal to the body of the main | ||||
stream. | ||||
395. | ||||
Every year when the boughs of a plant [or tree] have made an end of | ||||
maturing their growth, they will have made, when put together, a | ||||
thickness equal to that of the main stem; and at every stage of its | ||||
ramification you will find the thickness of the said main stem; as: | ||||
_i k_, _g h_, _e f_, _c d_, _a b_, will always be equal to each | ||||
other; unless the tree is pollard--if so the rule does not hold | ||||
good. | ||||
All the branches have a direction which tends to the centre of the | ||||
tree _m_. | ||||
[Footnote: The two sketches of leafless trees one above another on | ||||
the left hand side of Pl. XXVII, No. 1, belong to this passage.] | ||||
396. | ||||
If the plant n grows to the thickness shown at m, its branches will | ||||
correspond [in thickness] to the junction a b in consequence of the | ||||
growth inside as well as outside. | ||||
The branches of trees or plants have a twist wherever a minor branch | ||||
is given off; and this giving off the branch forms a fork; this said | ||||
fork occurs between two angles of which the largest will be that | ||||
which is on the side of the larger branch, and in proportion, unless | ||||
accident has spoilt it. | ||||
[Footnote: The sketches illustrating this are on the right hand side | ||||
of PI. XXVII, No. I, and the text is also given there in facsimile.] | ||||
397. | ||||
There is no boss on branches which has not been produced by some | ||||
branch which has failed. | ||||
The lower shoots on the branches of trees grow more than the upper | ||||
ones and this occurs only because the sap that nourishes them, being | ||||
heavy, tends downwards more than upwards; and again, because those | ||||
[branches] which grow downwards turn away from the shade which | ||||
exists towards the centre of the plant. The older the branches are, | ||||
the greater is the difference between their upper and their lower | ||||
shoots and in those dating from the same year or epoch. | ||||
[Footnote: The sketch accompanying this in the MS. is so effaced | ||||
that an exact reproduction was impossible.] | ||||
398. | ||||
OF THE SCARS ON TREES. | ||||
The scars on trees grow to a greater thickness than is required by | ||||
the sap of the limb which nourishes them. | ||||
399. | ||||
The plant which gives out the smallest ramifications will preserve | ||||
the straightest line in the course of its growth. | ||||
[Footnote: This passage is illustrated by two partly effaced | ||||
sketches. One of these closely resembles the lower one given under | ||||
No. 408, the other also represents short closely set boughs on an | ||||
upright trunk.] | ||||
400. | ||||
OF THE RAMIFICATION. | ||||
The beginning of the ramification [the shoot] always has the central | ||||
line [axis] of its thickness directed to the central line [axis] of | ||||
the plant itself. | ||||
401. | ||||
In starting from the main stem the branches always form a base with | ||||
a prominence as is shown at _a b c d_. | ||||
402. | ||||
WHY, VERY FREQUENTLY, TIMBER HAS VEINS THAT ARE NOT STRAIGHT. | ||||
When the branches which grow the second year above the branch of the | ||||
preceding year, are not of equal thickness above the antecedent | ||||
branches, but are on one side, then the vigour of the lower branch | ||||
is diverted to nourish the one above it, although it may be somewhat | ||||
on one side. | ||||
But if the ramifications are equal in their growth, the veins of the | ||||
main stem will be straight [parallel] and equidistant at every | ||||
degree of the height of the plant. | ||||
Wherefore, O Painter! you, who do not know these laws! in order to | ||||
escape the blame of those who understand them, it will be well that | ||||
you should represent every thing from nature, and not despise such | ||||
study as those do who work [only] for money. | ||||
The direction of growth (403-407). | ||||
403. | ||||
OF THE RAMIFICATIONS OF PLANTS. | ||||
The plants which spread very much have the angles of the spaces | ||||
which divide their branches more obtuse in proportion as their point | ||||
of origin is lower down; that is nearer to the thickest and oldest | ||||
portion of the tree. Therefore in the youngest portions of the tree | ||||
the angles of ramification are more acute. [Footnote: Compare the | ||||
sketches on the lower portion of Pl. XXVII, No. 2.] | ||||
404. | ||||
The tips of the boughs of plants [and trees], unless they are borne | ||||
down by the weight of their fruits, turn towards the sky as much as | ||||
possible. | ||||
The upper side of their leaves is turned towards the sky that it may | ||||
receive the nourishment of the dew which falls at night. | ||||
The sun gives spirit and life to plants and the earth nourishes them | ||||
with moisture. [9] With regard to this I made the experiment of | ||||
leaving only one small root on a gourd and this I kept nourished | ||||
with water, and the gourd brought to perfection all the fruits it | ||||
could produce, which were about 60 gourds of the long kind, andi set | ||||
my mind diligently [to consider] this vitality and perceived that | ||||
the dews of night were what supplied it abundantly with moisture | ||||
through the insertion of its large leaves and gave nourishment to | ||||
the plant and its offspring--or the seeds which its offspring had | ||||
to produce--[21]. | ||||
The rule of the leaves produced on the last shoot of the year will | ||||
be that they will grow in a contrary direction on the twin branches; | ||||
that is, that the insertion of the leaves turns round each branch in | ||||
such a way, as that the sixth leaf above is produced over the sixth | ||||
leaf below, and the way they turn is that if one turns towards its | ||||
companion to the right, the other turns to the left, the leaf | ||||
serving as the nourishing breast for the shoot or fruit which grows | ||||
the following year. | ||||
[Footnote: A French translation of lines 9-12 was given by M. | ||||
RAVAISSON in the _Gazette des Beaux Arts_, Oct. 1877; his paper also | ||||
contains some valuable information as to botanical science in the | ||||
ancient classical writers and at the time of the Renaissance.] | ||||
405. | ||||
The lowest branches of those trees which have large leaves and heavy | ||||
fruits, such as nut-trees, fig-trees and the like, always droop | ||||
towards the ground. | ||||
The branches always originate above [in the axis of] the leaves. | ||||
406. | ||||
The upper shoots of the lateral branches of plants lie closer to the | ||||
parent branch than the lower ones. | ||||
407. | ||||
The lowest branches, after they have formed the angle of their | ||||
separation from the parent stem, always bend downwards so as not to | ||||
crowd against the other branches which follow them on the same stem | ||||
and to be better able to take the air which nourishes them. As is | ||||
shown by the angle _b a c_; the branch _a c_ after it has made the | ||||
corner of the angle _a c_ bends downwards to _c d_ and the lesser | ||||
shoot _c_ dries up, being too thin. | ||||
The main branch always goes below, as is shown by the branch _f n | ||||
m_, which does not go to _f n o_. | ||||
The forms of trees (408--411). | ||||
408. | ||||
The elm always gives a greater length to the last branches of the | ||||
year's growth than to the lower ones; and Nature does this because | ||||
the highest branches are those which have to add to the size of the | ||||
tree; and those at the bottom must get dry because they grow in the | ||||
shade and their growth would be an impediment to the entrance of the | ||||
solar rays and the air among the main branches of the tree. | ||||
The main branches of the lower part bend down more than those above, | ||||
so as to be more oblique than those upper ones, and also because | ||||
they are larger and older. | ||||
409. | ||||
In general almost all the upright portions of trees curve somewhat | ||||
turning the convexity towards the South; and their branches are | ||||
longer and thicker and more abundant towards the South than towards | ||||
the North. And this occurs because the sun draws the sap towards | ||||
that surface of the tree which is nearest to it. | ||||
And this may be observed if the sun is not screened off by other | ||||
plants. | ||||
410. | ||||
The cherry-tree is of the character of the fir tree as regards its | ||||
ramification placed in stages round its main stem; and its branches | ||||
spring, 4 or five or 6 [together] opposite each other; and the tips | ||||
of the topmost shoots form a pyramid from the middle upwards; and | ||||
the walnut and oak form a hemisphere from the middle upwards. | ||||
411. | ||||
The bough of the walnut which is only hit and beaten when it has | ||||
brought to perfection... | ||||
[Footnote: The end of the text and the sketch in red chalk belonging | ||||
to it, are entirely effaced.] | ||||
The insertion of the leaves (412--419). | ||||
412. | ||||
OF THE INSERTION OF THE BRANCHES ON PLANTS. | ||||
Such as the growth of the ramification of plants is on their | ||||
principal branches, so is that of the leaves on the shoots of the | ||||
same plant. These leaves have [Footnote 6: _Quattro modi_ (four | ||||
modes). Only three are described in the text, the fourth is only | ||||
suggested by a sketch. | ||||
This passage occurs in MANZI'S edition of the Trattato, p. 399, but | ||||
without the sketches and the text is mutilated in an important part. | ||||
The whole passage has been commented on, from MANZI'S version, in | ||||
Part I of the _Nuovo Giornale Botanico Italiano_, by Prof. G. | ||||
UZIELLI (Florence 1869, Vol. I). He remarks as to the 'four modes': | ||||
"_Leonardo, come si vede nelle linie sententi da solo tre esempli. | ||||
Questa ed altre inessattezze fanno desiderare, sia esaminato di | ||||
nuovo il manoscritto Vaticano_". This has since been done by D. | ||||
KNAPP of Tubingen, and his accurate copy has been published by H. | ||||
LUDWIG, the painter. The passage in question occurs in his edition | ||||
as No. 833; and there also the drawings are wanting. The space for | ||||
them has been left vacant, but in the Vatican copy '_niente_' has | ||||
been written on the margin; and in it, as well as in LUDWIG'S and | ||||
MANZI'S edition, the text is mutilated.] four modes of growing one | ||||
above another. The first, which is the most general, is that the | ||||
sixth always originates over the sixth below [Footnote 8: _la sesta | ||||
di sotto. "Disposizione 2/5 o 1/5. Leonardo osservo probabilmente | ||||
soltanto la prima"_ (UZIELLl).]; the second is that two third ones | ||||
above are over the two third ones below [Footnote 10: _terze di | ||||
sotto: "Intende qui senza dubbio parlare di foglie decussate, in cui | ||||
il terzo verticello e nel piano del primo"_ (UZIELLI).]; and the | ||||
third way is that the third above is over the third below [Footnote | ||||
11: 3a _di sotto: "Disposizione 1/2"_ (UZIELLI).]. | ||||
[Footnote: See the four sketches on the upper portion of the page | ||||
reproduced as fig. 2 on P1. XXVII.] | ||||
413. | ||||
A DESCRIPTION OF THE ELM. | ||||
The ramification of the elm has the largest branch at the top. The | ||||
first and the last but one are smaller, when the main trunk is | ||||
straight. | ||||
The space between the insertion of one leaf to the rest is half the | ||||
extreme length of the leaf or somewhat less, for the leaves are at | ||||
an interval which is about the 3rd of the width of the leaf. | ||||
The elm has more leaves near the top of the boughs than at the base; | ||||
and the broad [surface] of the leaves varies little as to [angle | ||||
and] aspect. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXVII, No. 3. Above the sketch and close under | ||||
the number of the page is the word '_olmo_' (elm).] | ||||
414. | ||||
In the walnut tree the leaves which are distributed on the shoots of | ||||
this year are further apart from each other and more numerous in | ||||
proportion as the branch from which this shoot springs is a young | ||||
one. And they are inserted more closely and less in number when the | ||||
shoot that bears them springs from an old branch. Its fruits are | ||||
borne at the ends of the shoots. And its largest boughs are the | ||||
lowest on the boughs they spring from. And this arises from the | ||||
weight of its sap which is more apt to descend than to rise, and | ||||
consequently the branches which spring from them and rise towards | ||||
the sky are small and slender [20]; and when the shoot turns towards | ||||
the sky its leaves spread out from it [at an angle] with an equal | ||||
distribution of their tips; and if the shoot turns to the horizon | ||||
the leaves lie flat; and this arises from the fact that leaves | ||||
without exception, turn their underside to the earth [29]. | ||||
The shoots are smaller in proportion as they spring nearer to the | ||||
base of the bough they spring from. | ||||
[Footnote: See the two sketches on Pl XXVII, No. 4. The second | ||||
refers to the passage lines 20-30.] | ||||
415. | ||||
OF THE INSERTION OF THE LEAVES ON THE BRANCHES. | ||||
The thickness of a branch never diminishes within the space between | ||||
one leaf and the next excepting by so much as the thickness of the | ||||
bud which is above the leaf and this thickness is taken off from the | ||||
branch above [the node] as far as the next leaf. | ||||
Nature has so placed the leaves of the latest shoots of many plants | ||||
that the sixth leaf is always above the first, and so on in | ||||
succession, if the rule is not [accidentally] interfered with; and | ||||
this occurs for two useful ends in the plant: First that as the | ||||
shoot and the fruit of the following year spring from the bud or eye | ||||
which lies above and in close contact with the insertion of the leaf | ||||
[in the axil], the water which falls upon the shoot can run down to | ||||
nourish the bud, by the drop being caught in the hollow [axil] at | ||||
the insertion of the leaf. And the second advantage is, that as | ||||
these shoots develop in the following year one will not cover the | ||||
next below, since the 5 come forth on five different sides; and the | ||||
sixth which is above the first is at some distance. | ||||
416. | ||||
OF THE RAMIFICATIONS OF TREES AND THEIR FOLIAGE. | ||||
The ramifications of any tree, such as the elm, are wide and slender | ||||
after the manner of a hand with spread fingers, foreshortened. And | ||||
these are seen in the distribution [thus]: the lower portions are | ||||
seen from above; and those that are above are seen from below; and | ||||
those in the middle, some from below and some from above. The upper | ||||
part is the extreme [top] of this ramification and the middle | ||||
portion is more foreshortened than any other of those which are | ||||
turned with their tips towards you. And of those parts of the middle | ||||
of the height of the tree, the longest will be towards the top of | ||||
the tree and will produce a ramification like the foliage of the | ||||
common willow, which grows on the banks of rivers. | ||||
Other ramifications are spherical, as those of such trees as put | ||||
forth their shoots and leaves in the order of the sixth being placed | ||||
above the first. Others are thin and light like the willow and | ||||
others. | ||||
417. | ||||
You will see in the lower branches of the elder, which puts forth | ||||
leaves two and two placed crosswise [at right angles] one above | ||||
another, that if the stem rises straight up towards the sky this | ||||
order never fails; and its largest leaves are on the thickest part | ||||
of the stem and the smallest on the slenderest part, that is towards | ||||
the top. But, to return to the lower branches, I say that the leaves | ||||
on these are placed on them crosswise like [those on] the upper | ||||
branches; and as, by the law of all leaves, they are compelled to | ||||
turn their upper surface towards the sky to catch the dew at night, | ||||
it is necessary that those so placed should twist round and no | ||||
longer form a cross. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXVII, No. 5.] | ||||
418. | ||||
A leaf always turns its upper side towards the sky so that it may | ||||
the better receive, on all its surface, the dew which drops gently | ||||
from the atmosphere. And these leaves are so distributed on the | ||||
plant as that one shall cover the other as little as possible, but | ||||
shall lie alternately one above another as may be seen in the ivy | ||||
which covers the walls. And this alternation serves two ends; that | ||||
is, to leave intervals by which the air and sun may penetrate | ||||
between them. The 2nd reason is that the drops which fall from the | ||||
first leaf may fall onto the fourth or--in other trees--onto the | ||||
sixth. | ||||
419. | ||||
Every shoot and every fruit is produced above the insertion [in the | ||||
axil] of its leaf which serves it as a mother, giving it water from | ||||
the rain and moisture from the dew which falls at night from above, | ||||
and often it protects them against the too great heat of the rays of | ||||
the sun. | ||||
LIGHT ON BRANCHES AND LEAVES (420--422). | ||||
420. | ||||
That part of the body will be most illuminated which is hit by the | ||||
luminous ray coming between right angles. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXVIII, No. 1.] | ||||
421. | ||||
Young plants have more transparent leaves and a more lustrous bark | ||||
than old ones; and particularly the walnut is lighter coloured in | ||||
May than in September. | ||||
422. | ||||
OF THE ACCIDENTS OF COLOURING IN TREES. | ||||
The accidents of colour in the foliage of trees are 4. That is: | ||||
shadow, light, lustre [reflected light] and transparency. | ||||
OF THE VISIBILITY OF THESE ACCIDENTS. | ||||
These accidents of colour in the foliage of trees become confused at | ||||
a great distance and that which has most breadth [whether light or | ||||
shade, &c.] will be most conspicuous. | ||||
The proportions of light and shade in a leaf (423-426). | ||||
423. | ||||
OF THE SHADOWS OF A LEAF. | ||||
Sometimes a leaf has three accidents [of light] that is: shade, | ||||
lustre [reflected light] and transparency [transmitted light]. Thus, | ||||
if the light were at _n_ as regards the leaf _s_, and the eye at | ||||
_m_, it would see _a_ in full light, _b_ in shadow and _c_ | ||||
transparent. | ||||
424. | ||||
A leaf with a concave surface seen from the under side and | ||||
up-side-down will sometimes show itself as half in shade, and half | ||||
transparent. Thus, if _o p_ is the leaf and the light _m_ and the | ||||
eye _n_, this will see _o_ in shadow because the light does not fall | ||||
upon it between equal angles, neither on the upper nor the under | ||||
side, and _p_ is lighted on the upper side and the light is | ||||
transmitted to its under side. [Footnote: See Pl. XXVIII, No. 2, the | ||||
upper sketch on the page. In the original they are drawn in red | ||||
chalk.] | ||||
425. | ||||
Although those leaves which have a polished surface are to a great | ||||
extent of the same colour on the right side and on the reverse, it | ||||
may happen that the side which is turned towards the atmosphere will | ||||
have something of the colour of the atmosphere; and it will seem to | ||||
have more of this colour of the atmosphere in proportion as the eye | ||||
is nearer to it and sees it more foreshortened. And, without | ||||
exception the shadows show as darker on the upper side than on the | ||||
lower, from the contrast offered by the high lights which limit the | ||||
shadows. | ||||
The under side of the leaf, although its colour may be in itself the | ||||
same as that of the upper side, shows a still finer colour--a colour | ||||
that is green verging on yellow--and this happens when the leaf is | ||||
placed between | ||||
426. | ||||
the eye and the light which falls upon it from the opposite side. | ||||
And its shadows are in the same positions as those were of the | ||||
opposite side. Therefore, O Painter! when you do trees close at | ||||
hand, remember that if the eye is almost under the tree you will see | ||||
its leaves [some] on the upper and [some] on the under side, and the | ||||
upper side will be bluer in proportion as they are seen more | ||||
foreshortened, and the same leaf sometimes shows part of the right | ||||
side and part of the under side, whence you must make it of two | ||||
colours. | ||||
Of the transparency of leaves (427-429). | ||||
427. | ||||
The shadows in transparent leaves seen from the under side are the | ||||
same shadows as there are on the right side of this leaf, they will | ||||
show through to the underside together with lights, but the lustre | ||||
[reflected light] can never show through. | ||||
428. | ||||
When one green has another [green] behind it, the lustre on the | ||||
leaves and their transparent [lights] show more strongly than in | ||||
those which are [seen] against the brightness of the atmosphere. | ||||
And if the sun illuminates the leaves without their coming between | ||||
it and the eye and without the eye facing the sun, then the | ||||
reflected lights and the transparent lights are very strong. | ||||
It is very effective to show some branches which are low down and | ||||
dark and so set off the illuminated greens which are at some | ||||
distance from the dark greens seen below. That part is darkest which | ||||
is nearest to the eye or which is farthest from the luminous | ||||
atmosphere. | ||||
429. | ||||
Never paint leaves transparent to the sun, because they are | ||||
confused; and this is because on the transparency of one leaf will | ||||
be seen the shadow of another leaf which is above it. This shadow | ||||
has a distinct outline and a certain depth of shade and sometimes is | ||||
[as much as] half or a third of the leaf which is shaded; and | ||||
consequently such an arrangement is very confused and the imitation | ||||
of it should be avoided. | ||||
The light shines least through a leaf when it falls upon it at an | ||||
acute angle. | ||||
The gradations of shade and colour in leaves (430-434). | ||||
430. | ||||
The shadows of plants are never black, for where the atmosphere | ||||
penetrates there can never be utter darkness. | ||||
431. | ||||
If the light comes from _m_ and the eye is at _n_ the eye will see | ||||
the colour of the leaves _a b_ all affected by the colour of _m_ | ||||
--that is of the atmosphere; and _b c_ will be seen from the under | ||||
side as transparent, with a beautiful green colour verging on | ||||
yellow. | ||||
If _m_ is the luminous body lighting up the leaf _s_ all the eyes | ||||
that see the under side of this leaf will see it of a beautiful | ||||
light green, being transparent. | ||||
In very many cases the positions of the leaves will be without | ||||
shadow [or in full light], and their under side will be transparent | ||||
and the right side lustrous [reflecting light]. | ||||
432. | ||||
The willow and other similar trees, which have their boughs lopped | ||||
every 3 or 4 years, put forth very straight branches, and their | ||||
shadow is about the middle where these boughs spring; and towards | ||||
the extreme ends they cast but little shade from having small leaves | ||||
and few and slender branches. Hence the boughs which rise towards | ||||
the sky will have but little shade and little relief; and the | ||||
branches which are at an angle from the horizon, downwards, spring | ||||
from the dark part of the shadow and grow thinner by degrees up to | ||||
their ends, and these will be in strong relief, being in gradations | ||||
of light against a background of shadow. | ||||
That tree will have the least shadow which has the fewest branches | ||||
and few leaves. | ||||
433. | ||||
OF DARK LEAVES IN FRONT OF TRANSPARENT ONES. | ||||
When the leaves are interposed between the light and the eye, then | ||||
that which is nearest to the eye will be the darkest, and the most | ||||
distant will be the lightest, not being seen against the atmosphere; | ||||
and this is seen in the leaves which are away from the centre of the | ||||
tree, that is towards the light. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXVIII, No. 2, the lower sketch.] | ||||
434. | ||||
OF THE LIGHTS ON DARK LEAVES. | ||||
The lights on such leaves which are darkest, will be most near to | ||||
the colour of the atmosphere that is reflected in them. And the | ||||
cause of this is that the light on the illuminated portion mingles | ||||
with the dark hue to compose a blue colour; and this light is | ||||
produced by the blueness of the atmosphere which is reflected in the | ||||
smooth surface of these leaves and adds to the blue hue which this | ||||
light usually produces when it falls on dark objects. | ||||
OF THE LIGHTS ON LEAVES OF A YELLOWISH GREEN. | ||||
But leaves of a green verging on yellow when they reflect the | ||||
atmosphere do not produce a reflection verging on blue, inasmuch as | ||||
every thing which appears in a mirror takes some colour from that | ||||
mirror, hence the blue of the atmosphere being reflected in the | ||||
yellow of the leaf appears green, because blue and yellow mixed | ||||
together make a very fine green colour, therefore the lustre of | ||||
light leaves verging on yellow will be greenish yellow. | ||||
A classification of trees according to their colours. | ||||
435. | ||||
The trees in a landscape are of various kinds of green, inasmuch as | ||||
some verge towards blackness, as firs, pines, cypresses, laurels, | ||||
box and the like. Some tend to yellow such as walnuts, and pears, | ||||
vines and verdure. Some are both yellowish and dark as chesnuts, | ||||
holm-oak. Some turn red in autumn as the service-tree, pomegranate, | ||||
vine, and cherry; and some are whitish as the willow, olive, reeds | ||||
and the like. Trees are of various forms ... | ||||
The proportions of light and shade in trees (436-440). | ||||
436. | ||||
OF A GENERALLY DISTRIBUTED LIGHT AS LIGHTING UP TREES. | ||||
That part of the trees will be seen to lie in the least dark shadow | ||||
which is farthest from the earth. | ||||
To prove it let _a p_ be the tree, _n b c_ the illuminated | ||||
hemisphere [the sky], the under portion of the tree faces the earth | ||||
_p c_, that is on the side _o_, and it faces a small part of the | ||||
hemisphere at _c d_. But the highest part of the convexity a faces | ||||
the greatest part of the hemisphere, that is _b c_. For this | ||||
reason--and because it does not face the darkness of the earth--it | ||||
is in fuller light. But if the tree has dense foliage, as the | ||||
laurel, arbutus, box or holm oak, it will be different; because, | ||||
although _a_ does not face the earth, it faces the dark [green] of | ||||
the leaves cut up by many shadows, and this darkness is reflected | ||||
onto the under sides of the leaves immediately above. Thus these | ||||
trees have their darkest shadows nearest to the middle of the tree. | ||||
437. | ||||
OF THE SHADOWS OF VERDURE. | ||||